Home

Axial Winder SPW420 for the T400 Technology Board

1. Word 7 Setpoint W7 from CB 2 3 H444 4335 22 7 Status word 1 from T400 d335_ gt K4335 gt gt k Setpoint W8 from CB 2 3 H440 310 Transmit data Setpoint W9 from CB 2 3 92 8 Actual diameter KR0310 gt gt KR Word 1 Status word 1 to CB 2 3 f H441 0 Setpoint W10 from CB 2 3 2 3 p 2 3 Constant output 0 0 gt KR0000 gt KR Word 2 Actual value W2 to CB 2 3 H445 4336 Word 3 Actual value W3 to CB 2 3 22 7 Status word 2 from T400 daas LK K4336 gt gt K H442 0 Constant output 0 0 gt KR0000 gt KR Word 5 Actual value W5 to CB 2 3 H443 0 Word 6 Actual value W6 to CB 2 3 Constant output 0 0 gt KR0000 gt KR H446 0 Fane a Constant output 0 0 P KR0000 gt KR Word 8 Actual value W8 to CB 2 3 Word 8 Word 9 Word 10 ila Word 4 Status word 2 to CB 2 3 Word 7 Actual value W7 to CB 2 3 H447 0 Word 9 Actual value W9 to CB 2 3 Constant output 0 0 P KR0000 gt KR H448 0 Constant output 0 0 KR0000 gt KR H449 0 Constant output 0 0 KR0000 gt KR Word 10 Actual value W10 to CB 2 3 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R PROFIBUS DP Interface Sheet 15 T x H510 2000 ransmit data B 22 6 Control word 1 to CU gt Word 1 Control
2. Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Pre assignment of control words from CB and peer to peer Sheet 22a Control word 1 for T400 Control word1 for T400 K4332_ gt 1 Main contactor closed 4 4 Enable inverter 5 Enable ramp function generator 6 4 Start ramp function generator 7 4 Ramp function generator setpoint enable 8 Acknowledge fault 9 4 Local inching forwards 10 4Local inching backwards 117 Control from the PLC 12 4 Tension controller on 13 Tension controller inhibited 14 Standstill tension on 15 Set diameter 16 Hold diameter Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 Control words from T400 Control word 2 for T400 E Stet ON ACDO MAND WE M Control word 2 for T400 K4333_ gt Enter supplementary setpoint V Local positioning MOP 2 raise MOP 2 lower Local control Local stop Local run Lora crawl from T400 Set Vset to stop MOP 1 raise MOP 1 lower Web length reset Winding from below 15 Tachometer Controlword3 _ Control word 3 for T400 K4334_ gt 0 Polarity saturation setpoint Winder Gearbox stage 2 Accept setpoint A Accept setpoint B OMDNDORWN A SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet 22b Arithmetic Input 1 MUL_1 Input 1 ADD_1 Input quantity Kenn _1 H810 0 H840 0 A ae KR KR Output ADD_1 H804 0 SS Output MUL_1 KR Rp Input 2 MUL_1 KR081 gt Inp
3. 178 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Appendix B2014 Digital input 14 terminal 65 IF_CU BinOut Q8 B2114 Output imitvaluemonitort ez o1 cig0 q see B2122 Output imitvaluemonitor2 ez or caxnq B2253 int web break signa TENSZ ozT2o900 Hass B2404 d4o4 Output 2 rom limit value monitort iaz oresoao B2405 a405 Output 3 trom limit value monitort azz orcisoaas B2406 aso6 Output 4 trom limit value monitort azz orcisoaoas B2408 a408 Output 2 trom imitvauemontor2 Gs oressoaa B2409 d409 Output 3 from limit value montore Gs oressoaas B2410 d410_ Output 4 trom imitvauemontor2 GS oressoaoas IQ2Z_01 G130A Q5 B2501 Webbreaksignd Tensz ozTaisoa hsr B2502 gardai sanal v act 0 SEFZo7Se40Q Rs B2503 Tension controlon mensz ormioooa ss B2504 CU operatona F cUZustandswomas 524 B2505 Speed setpoin 0 Sd 27 01 G400 0M Rss B2508 Operatingenable LEONIS Or S120Q hss B2509 No operating erabe conz orczasa B2527 Digital input 9 terminal 46 H537 0 IF CUBinoutar B2528 Digital input 10 terminal 47 H538 0 lE CUBinouta2 B2529 Digital input 11 terminal 48 H5390 IF_CU Binouta3s B2530 Digital input 12 terminal 49 H540 0 IF CUBinoutaa oz oupwanzen eZ Az BQ asz3 ouputanz e eZ Anz BQ B2600 Controlword 1 0 fomes IF comsozar Has B2601 Controlword 1 1
4. Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples used to limit the speed controller output max diameter and max tension setpoint result in max torque lt 15 gt The tension controller output is limited via H195 typical value 0 1 lt 16 gt The compensation torque comprises friction and accelerating torque and is subtracted from the tension torque it helps to brake the unwinder Threading the When the material web is threaded the standard system operation is material web used The velocity setpoint limiting function executes this automatically refer to Chapter 3 1 2 5 After the material web has been threaded the tension control can establish the material tension Torque max D characteristic MII O I I I I I I I 1 Unwinding r W eb break H145 Fig 4 13 Speed torque characteristic with web break Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 87 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples Nip position W Q T L L 7 Tension transducer ire V set M II lt 1 gt Zset lt 1 gt n l V set Tachometer Tension setpoint Tension ac t ual value Term 90 91 Term 94 99 Term 92 93 lt 2 gt H 081 320 H 085 322 Zist lt 5 gt H 069 321 P L ss mm mm mm mm R eee mm sL a s mm R mm g mm R m R m R m N Filter Diam eter com puter 7 H172 32ms Tension controller of xX Hie
5. KRooe8 Output rom Hoss fixed vave v_set iaz oraiooay Hosa KRoozo0 Output from H070 fixed value V_compensation Qiz orarioay ovo KRo072 Output rom H072 fixed value V suppl s iaiz oraizoay ova KR0074 Output from H074 fixed value V_set localop iaizo1 Aizg0aY Movs KR0076 Output from Hoze fixed vave exemaiovt aiz oraisoay hoz KRoo7e Output trom Ho78 fixed value web width iaiz oraisoay ova KRoos0 Output trom Hogo fixed valueZ set iaz oraeoay Hos KRoos2 Output from H082 fixed valueZ suppl_set 1 1a1z oraizzoay Hogs pons Output trom Hoga fixed valueZ act iaz oraeoay KRoo8e Output from H086 fixed value max Z deviation Q z oraiooay Hoe KRoo88 Output from Hoge fixed vave D_set iaz oraooay Hoga KR0090 Output from H090 fixed value positioning ref IQ1Z_01 AI310A Y H091 value KR0095 oOo Output from H095 fixed value setpoint A 1Q1Z_01 AI340A Y H096 KR0127 i eal Output from H127 fixed val gearbox stage 1 2 1Q1Z_01 A350 Y H138 KR0128 Output from H128 fixed value adapt friction torque IQ1Z_01 A360 Y H229 gearbox stage 2 KR0140 dv dt from the central ramp function generator SREFZ_01 S51 Y KR0219 T Nact from shaft tachometer or CU backplane bus IF_CU D900 Y ee encoder 1 KR0222 e Output from H222 core diameter DIAMZ_01 P100 Y KR0228 W eb velocity actual value web tacho encoder 2 IF _CU D901 Y fF 176 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADY
6. TO lt S O O C M II V set 4 Dancer roll RA pe GSR es T i l A dat i T lt 4 gt Fale 4 gt L Zset lt 13 gt T lt lt 2 gt 0 10V Pos act valud ka Term 96 99 Term 90 91 Term 92 93 10 Term 97 99 H 097 324 H 069 320 H 081 321 H 103 328 P L B T a hare a H TT l Pos ref value H 082 0 H 083 82 T400 W inding hardness characteristic 7 H177 1 H206 0 Diameter com puter 8 lt 3 gt Position controller tension contr H1745 H 196 8 H 283 l l l l l l l l l l 1 X gt O O S l l l l z l l l l l S l l setpoint P443 3002 Speed act value Variable moment x k of inertia 9 k K p adaption D ae W idth h y y y L L Speed controller P232 3008 9 J Compen 9 d sations J Torque setpoint P734 05 165 Suppl torque 2 setpoint P506 3005 L lt 10 gt Torque actual value P734 06 24 l L Current controller L l meee 8 mm 8 mm a Fig 4 10 Unwinder with dancer roll speed correction control 3 Page 3 in the block diagram lt 2 gt Information in the text 82 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples 4 11 Configuring example Winder with tension transducer Note lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 9 gt lt 11 gt lt 14 gt A
7. 1Q2Z_01 M590 X2 Motorized potentiometer 2 standard rate of change Ramp up and ramp down times are parameterized together IQ2Z_01 M590 X1 Motorized potentiometer 1 fast rate of change Ramp up and ramp down times are parameterized together the fast rate of change starts if the raise or lower control commands are present for longer than 4s 1Q2Z_01 M390 X2 Motorized potentiometer 1 standard rate of change Ramp up and ramp down times are parameterized together 1Q2Z_01 M390 X1 Select operating mode motorized potentiometer 1 Motorized potentiometer 1 can be parameterized as a basic ramp function generator 0 motorized potentiometer 1 ramp function generator IQ2Z_01 M100 11 Setpoint ramp function generator operation Setpoint for H267 1 i e motorized potentiometer 1 is used as ramp function generator 1Q2Z_01 M120 X2 Ramp time ramp function generator operation For H267 1 ramp up and ramp down times are parameterized together IQ2Z_01 M130 X2 Smoothing analog input 3 Smoothing time constant analog input 3 IF_CU AI51 T Smoothing analog input 4 Smoothing time constant analog input 4 IF_CU AI66 T Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value KR0400 Type R Value 25000 Unit ms Type R Value 100000 Unit ms Type R Value 25000 Unit ms Type R Value 100000 Unit ms Type R Value 0 Type Value 1 0 Min 2 0 Max 2 0 Type R
8. Enables the communications interface peer to peer and its monitoring in order to reduce CPU utilization if peer to peer is not available 0 The complete peer to peer module is inhibited 1 Peer to peer interface is enabled 1Q1Z_01 B02 1 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value 0 Type B Value 0 Type B Value 0 Type Value 1 Type B Value 1 Type B Value 0 0 Min 0 0 Max 1 0 Type Value 0 Type Value 0 Type 125 Parameters H290 b d 6a H291 b d 6a H292 b d 6a H293 b d 6a H294 b d 6a H295 b d 13a d301 b d 5 d302 b d 9b d303 b d 6 d304 b d 8 d305 b d 19 d306 b d 19 d307 b d 13 126 Upper speed setpoint limiting Upper limit for the speed setpoint in the ramp function generator if H282 1 SREFZ_07 S1000 LU Lower speed setpoint limiting Lower limit for the speed setpoint in the ramp function generator if H282 1 SREFZ_07 S1000 LL Ramp up time speed setpoint For the speed setpoint in the ramp function generator if H282 1 SREFZ_07 S1000 TU Ramp down time speed setpoint For the speed setpoint in the ramp function generator if H282 1 SREFZ_07 S1000 TD Integral action time speed controller Integral action time for the speed controller on T400 if 282 1 SREFZ_07 S1100 TN Invert_mask Digital inputs can be inverted using the appropriate bit in parameter H295 Example
9. Setpoint positioning Fixed value 0 0 H091 90 KR0090 gt 7 KR Selection positioning setpoint Length setpoint 13 6 H262 400 Fixed value 2 0 KR0400 gt gt KR Setpoint positioning 5 6 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Inputs for setpoints Sheet 12 Speed actual value sensing Speed actual value 251 Rated pulse number H092 850 Speed actual value H212 Pulse number Actual value W2 from CU 3 8 15a 6 KR0550 gt KR0307 gt smoonthed 5 4 6 3 6a 4 8 1 9a 1 10 1 20 1 Smoonthing speed actual value n_act from T400 Pulse encoder 1 KR0220 gt Position actual value from T400 Note 1500 Rated speed Parameter changes from H212 to 7FC2 Mode H215 and H217 H218 only become effective after power off on mputtoreetpoint Web length and braking distance computer length stop 7F02 Mode Terminal 62 66 H213 600 Pulse number Terminal 86 88 H094 402 external web velocity Fixed value 0 0 KR0402 gt SKR KR0327 gt actual value 9a 1 Velocity from the digital Pulse encoder 2 web tachometer Position actual value from the digital web tachometer Rated speed 1000 Rated pulse number 1 H252 Reset length computer 17 6 s Length KR0309 gt Tension control on 8 2 B2503 computer Actual web length Web break 1 7 8 Operating enable 18 8
10. Supplementary velocity setpoint 5 1 H073 72 Fixed value 0 0 _H072 KR0072 gt KR Ratio Gearbox stage 2 5 6 H138 127 Fixed value 1 0 _H127 KR0127 gt KR Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 Inputs for setpoints Setpoint local mode 5 6 H075 H074 Fixed value 0 0 H074 KR0074 gt KR External dv dt 9b 1 H077 76 Fixed value 0 0 H076 KR0076 gt KR alternative dv dt 5 5 KR0140 Adaptation dv dt 1 0 0 5 Lm Web width 9b 1 H079 78 Fixed value 1 0 _H078 KR0078 gt KR Friction torque adaptation Gearbox stage 2 9b 2 H229 128 Fixed value 1 0 KR0128 gt gt KR SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet 11 Tension setpoint 7 1 Diameter setting value 9a 4 H081 80 Fixed value 0 0 _H080 KR0080 gt KR H089 88 Fixed value 0 1 _H088 KR0088 gt KR Core diameter 0 2 H222_ KR0222 gt 9a 3 Supplementary tension setpoint 8 1 H083 82 Fixed value 0 0 KR0082 gt gt KR ext status word 22 1 Tension actual value 7 1 H499 4549 Status word 1 K4549 K from CU 3 8 kasa gt H085 322 Analog input 3 KR0322 smoothed Term 94 99 kR0322 gt Kn Fixed status word K4498 gt Fixed value 0 0 H084 KR0084 gt Maximum tension reduction 7 1 H087 86 Fixed value 0 0 H086 KR0086 gt KR
11. b d 13 H213 b d 13 H214 b d 13 H215 b d 13 H216 b d 9a Droop tension controller Multiplication factor to parameterize droop with the component of the tension controller output if a steady state deviation is required between Z set and Zact TENSZ_01 T1795 X1 Adjustment web velocity Normalization factor to finely adjust the web velocity actual value DIAMZ_01 D910 X2 Select web tachometer When the web velocity is sensed using a web tachometer the actual value must be parameterized as source for the diameter computer 0 web tachometer not used 1 web tachom eter used DIAMZ_01 D1105 1 Pulse number shaft tachometer Specifies the pulses per revolution when using the digital speed actual value sensing on the T400 Caution Initialization required IF_CU D900 PR Pulse number web tachometer Specifies the number of pulses per revolution when using a web tachometer IF_CU D901 PR Rated speed shaft tachometer Maximum speed 1 0 at the minimum diameter and maximum web velocity This means H214 Vmax 1000 i Deore n whereby V m min D x mm and i Nmotor Nwinder Caution Initialization required IF_CU D900 RS Rated speed measuring roll web tachometer Maximum speed of the measuring roll 1 0 at the maximum web velocity Caution Initialization required IF_CU D901 RS Computation interval diameter computer Time for one revolution of the winder at minimum diameter and maximum we
12. CPU utiizatonts F cu cPu ausasty3s pass lass CPU utiizaton ta F cu cPu ausastya pras lass _ CPU utiizaton ts Ss IF cu cPu ausastys kross Actual diameter OV infrontoftheRFG 1 paz ozovoy kRos59 Actual diameter MV in trontoftnerFa 1 Diaz or disasy KRo400 Output from H400 fixed value length setpoint Q z o1 Aiszeay Masa kroso Output from H401 fixed value V connection tachometer q z oraseoay Hogs Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 177 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Appendix pans Output from H402 fixed value Vweb_act iaizo Aiss0aY Hoga KRo450 4450 Setpoint W2tromcB F COMSolwetw2Y spag a451 Setpoint W3tromcB F comsowenwsy prag aa52 Setpoint W5tromcB IF comsowenwsy poas a453 Setpoint WetromcB ss IF comsowen wey poa a454 Setpoint W7tromcB IF comsowenwzy KRo455 a455 Setpoint WetromcB IF comsowenwsy KRo456 a456 Setpoint WotromcB F comsowen woy pag a457 _ Setpoint Wiotromca F comsowenwioy kRo551 d551__ Actual value W3fromceu LE cuswetwsy kRo554 as54 ActualvalueW7tromcu IF CUstwetw7y kRo555 lass Actual value W8fromcu LE cuswetwsy KRo556 Output trom the positive torque imit SREFZo7MGPOSY 502 KRo557 Output trom the negative torque imit SREFZO7MGNEGY 503 KRo558 Supplementary torque setpoint sReFz oznTossy hs GS 01 Anz RAY C ases oupuanz Ra ez on Anz rey IQ2Z_01 Anz R3 Y
13. H821 b d 23a H822 b d 23a H823 b d 23a H824 b d 23a Input 2 MUL_2 Input 2 for multiplier 2 can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI_BST MUL_2 X2 Fixed setpoint_1 Freely assignable block for application specific fixed setpoint FREI_BST Fest_SW_1 X Fixed setpoint_2 Freely assignable block for application specific fixed setpoint FREI_BST Fest_SW_2 X Fixed setpoint_3 Freely assignable block for application specific fixed setpoint FREI_BST Fest_SW_3 X Input 1 UMS_1 Input 1 for numerical changeover switch 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI BST UMS_1 X1 Input 2 UMS_1 Input 2 for numerical changeover switch 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI_BST UMS_1 X2 Switch signal UMS_1 The input switch signal for numerical changeover switch 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant B_output Y 0 FREI BST UMS_1 1 Input 1 UMS_2 Input 1 for numerical changeover switch 2 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI BST UMS_2 X1 Input 2 UMS_2 Input 2 for numerical changeover switch 2 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y
14. If only low tension values are used e g for thin foils then the web Notes break detection using the torque and tension actual value signal is problematical and it may be more practical to use an external web break detection e g using optical barriers or dancer roll limit switches Caution The web break detection is not effective for the closed loop v constant control Param Parametername Explanation S monitoring indirect tension control Table 3 19 Parameters for web break detection 52 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description 3 6 2 Freely connectable limit value monitors block diagram 10 2 Limit value Two freely connectable limit value monitors are available They have monitors identical functions and the only difference is in the number of the parameters for setting Input signal One of the display parameters can be selected as input signal using BICO technology For the input signal the absolute value generation inversion and smoothing can be parameterized Comparison signal One of the display parameters or one of the fixed values available as parameter can be selected as comparison signal Inversion or absolute value generation are possible for adaptation purposes Output signal For the actual limit value monitors the interval limit H112 H120 hysteresis H113 H121 and the output signal to be displayed can be selected The outputs of the limit value
15. SIEMENS Standard Software Package Axial Winder SPW420 for the T400 Technology Board Software Version 2 0 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Warning information Abbreviations AG CB CU CUVC CUMC CUD1 xxx FB Hxxx n_act n_set PG PTP PtP T400 TA b d n v USS Automation unit PLC Communications board such as CBP CB1 Base drive converter or converter New SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Motion Control SIMOREG DC MASTER Technology parameters number xxx cannot be changed Function block Technology parameters number xxx can be changed Torque Speed Speed actual value Speed setpoint Programmer e g PG685 PG730 PG750 Peer to peer communications T400 technology module Sampling time Block diagram Page n Web velocity USS communications Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Warning information Contents 0 Warning information sssesssssseseeeeesseeeeeesss eee eesssssee cesses eenn Kereon 6 UE oA a An A A 8 Wed VANY e a r a aaa raaa aaa eaa a edna e aa aa a aaa a aa aa 8 h Re TT Te TTU 8 1 2 1 T400 technology module TTT 9 12 2 Interface module CB isise a a aa aat aaraa 10 1 3 Overview of the closed loop winder control sss sse eee eee ee ma 11 1 3 1 Hardware software prerequisites see eee eee ee eee eeneaeees 11 1 3 2 Main features of the closed loop winder control sss sese eee eee e 11
16. Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Unit Type Value Min Max Type 1 0 R 1 0 0 1 2 0 2 0 0 05 2 0 2 0 0 05 2 0 2 0 0 10 2 0 2 0 0 20 2 0 2 0 10000 ms 0 0 2 0 2 0 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H150 b d 6a H151 b d 6a H152 b d 6a H153 b d 6a H154 b d 5 H155 b d 5 H157 b d 6 H159 b d 6 Start of adaptation The speed controller gain is adapted to the variable moment of inertia the intervention of Kp adaptation is defined using H150 Note Parameterization only if the speed controller is operational on the T400 i e H282 1 SREFZ_07 NC035 A1 Kp adaptation min Gain for the speed controller on the T400 at the start of adaptation Note Parameterization only if the speed controller is operational on the T400 i e H282 1 SREFZ_07 NC035 B1 End of adaptation End point of Kp adaptation for the speed controller Note Parameterization only if the speed controller is operational on the T400 i e H282 1 SREFZ_07 NC035 A2 Kp adaptation max Gain of the speed controller on the T400 at the end of adaptation i e when the maximum moment of inertia occurs This setting must be determined at start up using speed controller optimization runs with the roll as full as possible Note Para
17. All of the parameters are reset to the factory setting The T400 must be appropriately parameterized for the new plant system or a parameter set must be read in e g using SIMOVIS The factory setting is established as follows whereby the memory type RAM or EEPROM this only involves SIMOVIS is of no significance H250 165 set H160 from 0 to 1 power down the drive converter Note The factory setting only becomes effective after the equipment has been powered up again with the exception of H160 We recommend that H160 is power up again Measures for a full EEPROM parameter changes are no longer possible 1 APC with SIMOVIS is required 2 SIMOVIS Changeover the SIMOVIS memory type from EEPROM to RAM by clicking on the RAM symbol in the main menu 3 Establish factory setting as described above after powering up again H160 is now 0 4 Then changeover the SIMOVIS memory type back to EEPROM Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 153 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Commissioning the winder 7 2 Commissioning the winder functions 7 2 1 Checking the speed actual value calibration Principle The maximum speed is obtained at the maximum web velocity and the minimum diameter also refer to Chapter 3 2 2 N Nmax if web velocity 1 0 and diameter D core H222 closed loop velocity controlled operation of the winder e g by selecting local operation and local inching forwards The required inching setpoint is
18. CU V C L NZ Current controller E LHS Fig 4 12 Winder with tension transducer torque limiting control B Page 3 in the block diagram lt 2 gt Information in the text Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 lt 7 gt 4 M I 85 Configuring instructions and examples 4 12 Configuring example Unwinder with tension transducer 86 Note lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 9 gt lt 11 gt lt 14 gt An example for an unwinder with tension transducer and closed loop torque limiting control is shown in Fig 4 14 Tension setpoint and web velocity setpoint Machine velocity are entered at terminals 90 91 and 92 93 as analog signals A pulse encoder as shaft tachometer is used for actual speed sensing this is connected at the base drive The diameter computer continuously computes the diameter according to the following formula web velocity diameter _ speed A speed setpoint is input into the speed controller which corresponds to the actual web velocity plus the saturation setpoint H145 set H145 to approx 0 05 0 1 The velocity setpoint limiting and the saturation provide automatic protection against web sag The saturation setpoint means that the speed controller goes into saturation when the material web is present i e it goes to its negative output limit When an attempt is made to
19. DIAMZ_01 P500 X2 Input dv dt 0O the internally computed value is used 1 the external value is used DIAMZ_01 P160 I Variable moment of inertia Adjustment factor to compensate the variable moment of inertia when accelerating DIAMZ_01 P332 X1 Constant moment of inertia Enters the computed moment of inertia for the motor gearbox and mandrel DIAMZ_01 P340 X1 Input friction torque adaptation factor gearbox stage 2 Input for the friction torque adaptation factor gearbox 2 must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0128 fixed value adaptation factor DIAMZ_07 P915 X2 Friction torque at 0 speed Absolute torque setpoint d331 at 0 speed DIAMZ_07 P910 B1 Friction torque at 20 speed Absolute torque setpoint d331 at 20 speed DIAMZ_07 P910 B2 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value Min Max Type Value Unit Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type 0 2 0 0 1 0 32 ms 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 R 0 0 0 0 2 0 R KR0128 R 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 119 Parameters H232 b d 9b H233 b d 9b H234 b d 9b H235 b d 9b H236 b d 9a H237 b d 9b H238 b d 9a H239
20. IF_CU CPU Auslast Y5 Fixed value length setpoint Enters the length setpoint 1Q1Z_01 Al328A X Velocity actual value connection tachometer Enters the velocity actual value connection tachometer 1Q1Z_01 AI329A X Fixed value external web velocity actual value Enters the external web velocity actual value 1Q1Z_01 AI330A X Output 1 from limit value monitor 1 Input value gt comparison value 1Q2Z_01 G130A Q1 Output 2 from limit value monitor 1 Input value lt comparison value 1Q2Z_01 G130A Q2 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Min Max Type Min Type Min Type Min Max Type Min Max Unit Type Min Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Type Type 2 0 R 0 150000 m R 0 2 0 131 Parameters d405 b d 10 d406 b d 10 d407 b d 10 d408 b d 10 d409 b d 10 d410 b d 10 d411 b d 10 H440 b d 15 H441 b d 15 H442 b d 15 132 Output 3 from limit value monitor 1 Input value comparison value IQ2Z_01 G130A Q3 Output 4 from limit value monitor 1 Input value comparison value 1Q2Z_01 G130A Q4 Output 1 from limit value monitor 2 Input value gt comparison value 1Q2Z_01 G330A Q1 Output 2 from limit value monitor 2 Input value lt comparison value 1Q2Z_01 G330A Q2 Output 3 from limit value monitor 2 Input value comp
21. In this case when accelerating the threading setpoints should be entered at the standard web velocity setpoint input The torque limit is enabled when a tension setpoint is entered When the tension is established the torque limit automatically takes over the drive control D core O 1 I W inding l direction i 1 I 1 I 1 I N Accelerating tension already established 1 TT W eb break I RH 145 n Fig 4 11 Speed torque characteristic with web break Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples Nip position gt Q C Tension transducer PS V set lt 1 gt Zset lt 1 gt l V set Tachometer nr Tension setpoint Tension act Yalue Term 90 91 Term 94 99 Term 92 93 lt 2 gt H 081 320 H 085 322 Zact lt 5 gt H 069 321 ee Bye eee ae eyes an ee Filter Diameter com puter 9 lt 3 gt c Tension controlldr oo Ea L im iting lt 15 gt H194 1 18 H 195 0 1 jr bo hiz2 32ms 172 32ms L 9 gt C 9 lt 14 gt Variable moment ov inertia gt OX 8 Torque actual value Speed setpoint Speed act value D nact W ith P734 06 24 P443 3002 9 b SR L t Speed L a controller 1 P226 3008 K p adaption EW itt stations Lo L 7 Positive torque limit 493 3006 Negative torque lim it P499 3007 1 0 E j Winder from above or
22. Normalization factor for the influence of the compensation signal SREFZ_01 5120 X2 Input ratio gearbox stage 2 The input for the ratio gearbox stage 2 can be connected with an application specific source Default KR0127 output of H127 fixed value SREFZ_01 S140 X2 Normalization web velocity Normalization factor for the web velocity setpoint SREFZ_01 5150 X1 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Parameters Value B2000 Type B Value 0 0 Min 2 0 Max 2 0 Type R Value 1 10 Min 0 0 Max 2 0 Type R Value 1 1 Min 2 0 Max 1 0 Type R Value 30000 Unit ms Type R Value 30000 Unit ms Type R Value 3000 Unit ms Type R Value 3000 Unit ms Type R Value 1 0 Min 2 0 Max 2 0 Type R Value KR0127 Min 2 0 Max 2 0 Type R Value 1 0 Min 2 0 Max 2 0 Type R 109 Parameters H140 b d 11 H141 b d 5 H142 b d 5 H143 b d 5 H144 b d 5 H145 b d 5 H146 b d 5 H147 b d 6 H148 b d 21 H149 b d 6 110 Normalization acceleration Normalization factor for acceleration dv dt calculated by the central ramp function generator b d 5 A value should be set at H140 which for the actual dv dt d302 for the set ramp up time H133 should then supply 1 0 This means H140 b 1 0 if external dv dt selected H226 1 and H077 KRO140 SREFZ_01 S51 X2 Influence tension contr
23. Note Only used for closed loop dancer roll position controls TENSZ_01 T1796 TD Inhibit D controller Generally the addition of the D component for tension control is only used for closed loop dancer roll position controls otherwise the D component remains inhibited 0 D controller enabled for dancer rolls 1 D controller inhibited TENSZ_01 T643 1 Ramp up time tension setpoint Ramp up time for the main tension position reference value TENSZ_01 T1350 TU Ramp down time tension setpoint Ramp down time for the main tension position reference value TENSZ_01 T1350 TD Inhibit tension setpoint When the winding hardness characteristic is used for dancer roll support the tension setpoint must be disconnected In this case the position reference value is entered via the supplementary tension setpoint Q normal operation 1 tension setpoint inhibited TENSZ_01 T1485 1 Response at web break 0 none only the message signal is displayed 1 closed loop tension control is switched out and the diameter computer is inhibited TENSZ_07 T2110 12 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value Type Value Type Value Unit Type Value Unit Type Value Type Value Unit Type Value Unit Type Value Type Value Type B2000 B2000 150 ms 800 ms 10000 ms 10000 ms 113 Parameters H179 b d 7
24. Value 10000 Unit ms Type R Value 8 Unit ms Type R Value 8 Unit ms Type R 123 Parameters H272 Dead zone for dv dt computation Value 0 01 Dead zone to calculate the dv dt value All acceleration signals which are less than Min 2 0 this limit are suppressed The slowest velocity ramp sometimes generates an l 9 GR s Max 2 0 unnecessary value as acceleration signal The limit value should lie below this Example Type R H220 100 s slowest ramp 500 s gt H272 0 2 100 s 500 s 1 0 4 0 04 b d 9b DIAMZ_01 P147Z TH H273 Normalization torque setpoint from CU on T400 Value 1 0 CUVC CUMC and CUD1 H273 1 0 The values of the torque setpoint at r269 Min 0 0 CUVC CUMC and d330 T400 are the same Max 1 0 CU2 H273 0 25 The values of the torque setpoint at r246 CU2 and d329 T400 Type are the same CU3 A torque setpoint is not output ond 1Q1Z_01 Al21 X2 H274 Normalization torque actual value from CU on T400 Value 1 0 CUMC CUVC and CUD1 H274 1 0 The values of the torque actual value at Min 0 0 K184 connected to a display parameter CUMC and d330 T400 are the same Max 1 0 CU2 CU3 H274 25 The values of the torque actual value at r007 CU2 CU3 Type R and d330 T400 are the same bad 1Q1Z_01 Al21A X2 H275 Response threshold web break monitoring indirect tension control Value 0 25 H275 1 tension controller output torque actual value tension controller output Min 0 0 M
25. b d 11 102 Offset analog input 3 Offset for analog input 3 terminals 94 99 the offset is added after adaptation IF_CU AI40 OFF Adaptation analog input 4 Adaptation factor for analog input 4 terminals 95 99 input range 10V corresponds to 1 0 IF_CU AI55A X1 Offset analog input 4 Offset for analog input 4 terminals 95 99 the offset is added after adaptation IF_CU AI55 OFF Adaptation analog input 5 Adaptation factor for analog input 5 terminals 96 99 input range 10V corresponds to 1 0 IF_CU AI70A X1 Offset analog input 5 Offset for analog input 5 terminals 96 99 the offset is added after adaptation IF_CU AI70 OFF Actual word W4 PtP Send word 4 from the peer to peer protocol must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant output Y 0 0 IF_PEER Istwert_W4 X Actual word W5 PtP Send word 5 from the peer to peer protocol must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant output Y 0 0 IF_PEER Istwert_W5 X Setpoint W4 PtP Receive word 4 from the peer to peer protocol KROO66 can be connected with the application specific destination IF_PEER Sollwert_W4 Y Setpoint W5 PtP Receive word 5 from peer to peer protocol KRO067 can be connected with the application specific destination IF_PEER Sollwert_W5 Y Fixed value velocity setpoint Enters a fixed value as technology parameter 1Q1Z_01 Al200A X
26. b d 13 H240 b d 13 H241 b d 13 120 Friction torque at 40 speed Absolute torque setpoint d331 at 40 speed DIAMZ_07 P910 B3 Friction torque at 60 speed Absolute torque setpoint d331 at 60 speed DIAMZ_07 P910 B4 Friction torque at 80 speed Absolute torque setpoint d331 at 80 speed DIAMZ_07 P910 B5 Friction torque at 100 speed Absolute torque setpoint d331 at 100 speed DIAMZ_07 P900 X Diameter change monotone For H236 1 only monotone diameter changes are permitted The diameter for winders can only increase for unwinders only decrease 0 standard operation 1 only monotone changes permitted DIAMZ_01 D1704 1 Pre control with n Compensation with the square of the speed actual value this is occasionally used for thick material webs if the diameter quickly changes at high motor speeds DIAMZ_07 P940 X2 Minimum diameter change time Time for winding unwinding at maximum material increase decrease i e at D min and V max H238 H216 Dmax E Dmin 2 a ms where D mm d mm and V m min refer to Chapter 4 1 Example refer to Chapter 3 5 1 DIAMZ_01 D1670 X2 Adaptation devisor length computer Normalization web length computer H239 75 km Ln H240 1 0 if H239 lt 1 9 where L the rated length for actual length 1 0 refer to Chapter 3 5 2 DIAMZ_07 W10 X2 Adaptation factor length computer Normalization web length computer H240 L 75 km
27. b d 23b H863 b d 23b H864 b d 23b H865 b d 23b H866 b d 23b H867 b d 23b H868 b d 23b H870 b d 23b H871 b d 23b H876 b d 23b 146 Input AusV The input for the switch off delay stage can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant B_output Y 0 FREI_BST AusV Delay time AusV Pulse delay time for the switch off delay stage FREI BST AusV T Input ImpV The input for the pulse shortening stage can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant B_output Y 0 FREI_BST ImpV I Delay time ImpV Pulse delay time for the pulse shortener stage FREI_BST ImpV T Input ImpB The input for the pulse generator can be connected to the application specific source Default B2000 constant B_output Y 0 FREI_BST ImpB I Pulse duration ImpB Pulse duration for the pulse generator FREI_BST ImpB T Input Inv The input for the pulse inverter can be connected to the application specific source Default B2000 constant B_output Y 0 FREI_BST Invt l Input 1 AND_1 Input 1 for the logical AND can be connected with the application specific source Default B2001 constant B_output FREI_BST AND_1 l1 Input 2 AND_1 Input 2 for the logical AND can be connected with the application specific source Default B2001 constant B_output FREI_BST AND_1 12 Input 1 OR_1 Input 1 for the logical
28. compensation and without saturation setpoint closed loop tension control disabled the actual value measured at the winder shaft must correspond with the entered setpoint The actual diameter available in the closed loop control d310 must be identical with the mechanically measured diameter of the winder shaft It is practical if the core diameter is adjusted with an empty mandrel Procedure Depending on the source CU or T400 refer to block diagram 13 of the speed actual value sensing the appropriate parameters are set in the basic drive Pxxx or T400 Hxxx For each of the following points check the speed actual value e Enter the core diameter H222 e Select the core diameter as the diameter setting value H89 KR0222 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 33 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description e Issue the Set diameter command activate H024 B2001 minimum pulse duration 100 ms 1 Using a digital tachometer e Enter the number of pulses per revolution at H212 and or the appropriate parameters in the basic drive e Specify the rated motor speed min diameter max velocity and normal gearbox ratio Vma 1000 i Deore THT at H214 and or PXxx e Select the encoder mode with H217 if HO92 219 2 Using an analog tachometer e Speed actual value from base drive converter e g for CUVC P734 02 148 HO92 550 e Calibrate the speed actual value at the basic drive converter with P138 in
29. eS Gearbox ratio 2 EO Speed winding motor Speed winder shat 5 1 for the standard gearbox stage Speed winding motor SPEEA winder shatt 7 1 for gearbox stage 2 H138 KR0127 H127 5 7 100 71 4 0 714 3 3 4 Two operating modes block diagram 18 General System operation Caution Local operation 36 There are two operating modes for the winder System operation and local operation t is not possible to toggle between the modes without shutting down The changeover between these two modes is realized using the Local operator control command either via fixed value binector B2000 B2001 or terminal 59 or via control word 2 bit 5 from the COMBOARD the source is selected using H027 The operating modes are mutually interlocked i e if the Local operator control signal level changes during operation then the system is always shutdown This mode is selected using the Off1 On 1 H045 control signal The power on command is transferred to the base drive the main contactor is closed and the DC link is charged When the base drive sends a checkback signal indicating that the drive is ready the winder waits for the operating enable block diagram 18 from the System start H021 and after being enabled accelerates to the setpoint refer to Chapter 3 1 2 The Off1 On 0 control signal must be set to 0 to power down the system When the winder comes to a standstill zero speed the ba
30. fast stop ramp down time P466 in the base drive CUVC so that the drive still does not reach the torque limit at approximately half the diameter and is cleanly shutdown using the closed loop speed control For higher diameters and moments of inertia the braking characteristic becomes effective and the braking time is appropriately extended Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 161 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Commissioning the winder If this function is not required then 2 0 can be entered in H257 and H259 7 3 Operation with the communications module CBP CB1 Factory setting Enable Suppression Note T400 in the SRT400 The factory setting assumes no communication module which is at slot 3 center i e PROFIBUS communications is not enabled and alarm fault messages are suppressed If there is a communications module then this must be taken into account with the following parameters H288 1 PROFIBUS enable H011 Enable alarm suppression bit6 1 H012 Enable fault suppression bit6 1 H495 H496 telegram monitoring time Suppresses this alarm and fault all others are effective H011 BF H012 BF Otherwise a message will occur on PMU alarm A103 fault F122 Refer to Chapter 8 2 In addition to setting parameters H288 H495 and H496 other parameters H602 H604 are required to initialize the COMBOARD also refer to Chapter 2 1 2 7 4 Operation with peer to peer Factory settin
31. i e the value used in the processor H256 scaling factor SREFZ_07 BD10 A1 Reduced braking torque Braking torque for a fast stop and at a low speed SREFZ_07 BD10 B1 Braking characteristic speed point 2 Speed above which the maximum braking torque acts Scaling factor 10 0 i e the value used in the processor H258 scaling factor SREFZ_07 BD10 A2 Maximum braking torque Braking torque for a fast stop and at a high speed SREFZ_07 BD10 B2 Value Type Value Type Value Min Units Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type DI B2253 300 0 0 ms 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 02 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H262 b d 12 H263 b d 19 H264 b d 19 H265 b d 19 H266 b d 19 H267 b d 19 H268 b d 19 H269 b d 19 H270 b d 10 H271 b d 10 Input length setpoint Input for the length setpoint with 1 0 75000 m can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO400 output from H400 fixed value IQ Z_01 Al328 X Motorized potentiometer 2 fast rate of change Ramp up and ramp down times are parameterized together the fast rate of change starts if the raise or lower control commands are present for longer than 4s
32. oy aint K Kno 0222 Web width 11 7 Va 1000 ms _H243 a Smoonthing Dead zone dv dt Scalling 1000 ms 0 01 100 at the output dV L dt for 1s ramp Dead zone gt KR0340 Compenssted web velocity 5 8 Smoonthing 32 ms _H223 External dv dt 11 7 Absolute speed actual value 9a 2 Pre control with n2 V Setpoint 5 7 Friction characteristic friction torque for speed 0 0 Friction torque for speed 0 2 Friction torque for speed 0 4 Friction torque for speed 0 6 Friction torque for speed 0 8 Friction torque for speed 1 0 Adapt friction torque gearbox stage 2 11 7 Gearbox stage 2 16 8 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 Pre control J v Automatic density correction only for H203 1 2 Constant moment of inertia KR0314 gt Pre controlled torque Friction compensation Winding from below 16 4 Const Gearbox ratio 2 Width density KR0308 gt Variable moment of inertia 3 2 6a 1 8 2 15a 5 Actual dv dt KR0316 gt Pre controlled torque Inertia compensation KR0312 gt Pre controlled torque 6 1 8 7 Changeover pre controlled torque 6 2 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet 9b a Analog inputs at T400 1 b Analog outputs at T400 Adaptation Offset Terminal 90 A A Feini 91 KR0320 gt Analog input 1 TA 2ms Offset Adaptation Analog output 1 inal 92 lan S
33. to invert digital input 2 H295 16 2 digitalinput 8 7654321 bitin H295 00000010 IF_CU Bit_Invert 12 Effective web velocity setpoint SREFZ_01 S160 Y Actual dv dt DIAMZ_01 P500 Y Speed setpoint SREFZ_07 NC122 Y Sum tension position reference value TENSZ_01 T1525 Y Output motorized potentiometer 1 IQ2Z_01 M450 Y Output motorized potentiometer 2 1Q2Z_01 M650 Y Speed actual value 1Q1Z_01 AI325 Y Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Unit Type Value Unit Type Value Unit Type Value Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type 1000 ms 1000 ms 300 ms Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 d308 b d 9b d309 b d 13 d310 b d 9a d311 b d 7 d312 b d 9b d313 b d 8 d314 b d 9b d316 b d 9b d317 b d 8 d318 b d 8 d319 b d 8 d320 b d 10 d321 b d 10 d322 b d 10 Variable moment of inertia DIAMZ_01 P320 Y Actual web length 1 0 75000m DIAMZ_01 W21 Y Actual diameter DIAMZ_01 D1706 Y Tension actual value smoothed TENSZ_01 T641 Y Pre control torque Sum of the friction and acceleration effects DIAMZ_07 P1060 Y Output closed loop tension control Sum of the tension controller output and pre control if H203 0 1 2 tension controlle
34. which is input into the speed controller with a positive polarity sign which means that the dancer roll actual value tracks the entered position reference value The D controller is used to dampen the dancer roll and prevents oscillation between the dancer roll and winder the following parameters should be set H174 0 H196 1 and H283 0 The speed setpoint is obtained from the total velocity setpoint divided by the diameter Generally the position controller output has a relatively low effect of approx 0 02 0 1 on the speed controller The tension controller output can be limited using H195 the influence on the velocity setpoint can be normalized using H141 When the web breaks the dancer roll falls to its lower end stop and the position controller goes to its output limit as it can no longer maintain the reference position This means that the speed increases by the value set at H195 refer to Chapter 3 6 1 The compensation torques for friction and acceleration are added as supplementary torque setpoints after the speed controller Generally for the dancer roll position control friction compensation is not required and normally inertia compensation is not required For a winder with dancer roll there is normally no external tension setpoint Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 77 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples Threading the web Torque characteristic 78 For a dancer roll
35. which is set enables the appropriate fault also refer to Chapter 8 2 Bit fault significance 0 F116 overspeed positive 1 F117 overspeed negative 2 F118 overtorque positive 3 F119 overtorque negative 4 F120 stall protection 5 F121 data receive from CU faulted 6 F122 data receive from CB faulted 7 F123 data receive from PTP faulted IF_CU SE040 12 Input connection tachometer on Input for the compute diameter command with tachometer must be connected with the application specific source Default B2634 control word 2 14 from CB 1Q1Z_07 B207A Inching time Delay after an inching command is inactive and before the base drive is shutdown CONTZ_07 C2736 X Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value 0 50 Min 0 Max 2 0 Type R Value 500 Min 0 Unit ms Type R Value 0 Min 0 Max FF Type W Value 0 Min 0 Max FF Type W Value B2634 Type B Value 10000 Min 0 Unit ms Type R 95 Parameters H015 b d 2 14 H016 b d 2 14 H017 b d 2 14 d018 b d 2 14 d019 b d 2 14 H021 b d 17 H022 b d 17 96 Status word 1 PtP Input for status word 1 from the peer to peer interface must be connected with the application specific source Default K4335 status word 1 from T400 IF_PEER Zustandswort X Actual word W2 PtP Send word 2 from the peer to peer protocol must be connected with the application spec
36. with the specified web velocity setpoint e g as the master drive of a rewinder 3 4 2 Closed loop speed control block diagram 6 6a External or internal H282 Note The universal applicability of the T400 allows closed loop speed control to be implemented in two ways The closed loop speed control is either externally implemented in the connected drive converter or is internally executed on the T400 processor module for stand alone operation in the SRT 400 One of these alternatives is selected using the Speed controller changeover to CU or T400 option which can be set using parameter H282 Parameter H282 is preset to 0 i e the speed control is executed in the drive converter The standard axial winder software package specifies the speed setpoint influences the torque limits and outputs a supplementary torque setpoint for the necessary compensation functions 3 4 2 1 Influence of the speed controller block diagram 6 For closed loop tension controlled operation either the speed controller limits torque limiting control are influenced or the speed setpoint speed correction control It is possible to adapt the gain to the variable moment of inertia The controller is set at start up using automatic optimization routines Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 41 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description 3 4 2 2 Kp adaptation block diagram 6a Mode of operation The controller gain is adapted
37. 0 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 Inputs for control commands Diameter hold 7 1 9a 1 Set velocity setpoint to Stop 5 1 Wind from below 5 4 5 8 6 1 9b 4 Accept setpoint A 5 1 Accept H037 2000 B2000 B setpoint B 5 1 Constant digital output 0 H038 2608 Local inching B2608 B forwards 18 1 Control word 1 8 from CB 22a 4 B2648 __ Control word 1 8 from PTP 22a 5 H039 2627 Local crawl B2627 B 18 1 Control word 2 7 from CB 22a 7 H040 2609 B2609 B Control word 1 9 from CB 22a 4 B2649 __ Control word 1 9 from PTP 22a 5 Local inching backwards 18 1 H042 2000 B2000 B Constant digital output 0 Gearbox stage 2 5 7 9b 2 H043 2000 B2000 B Constant digital output 0 H044 2000 B2000 B Constant digital output 0 H045 2600 B2600 B Control word 1 0 from CB 22a 4 B2640 __ Control word 1 0 from PTP 22a 5 Polarity saturation setpoint 5 1 Off1 on 0 1 18 1 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet 16 Tachometer 9a 1 H013 2634 B2634 B Control word 2 14 from CB 22a 7 Ramp function H046 2604 B2604 B Control word 1 4 from CB 22a 4 B2644_ Control word 1 4 from PTP 22a 5 Standstill tension on 7
38. 07 99 Appendix Kasse daaz_ Controlword ttromt400_ GE ovpaiaas kass ass3 Conroiword2tomTaoo cz ovpanas kassa assa Controiword3tomTaoo GE ozszsoas kasaz as37 Alarm messagetromTaoo F cusuisooas kass asss raste Tann sr cusuzoas aag lag Status display CB receive IF COMEmpt comyTs kaas pegas nad conz ormoas ass foutput anz ozoazny as T Sap R PARAMZ OL SimdynY eo Table 10 3 List of block I O connectors and binectors Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 181 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Appendix 10 4 Block diagram 182 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 List of contents block diagram Standard SPW420 axial winder software package for SIMOVERT SIMOREG Contents Overview Explanation of the abbreviations and symbols Signal flow overview terminals DPRAMS serial interfaces data transfer at an example T400 lt gt CUVC Overview structures for closed loop speed and tension position control erase EEPROM Setpoint actual values conditioning calculation Speed setpoint conditioning Pre control Torque limiting supplementary torque setpoint standstill identification Tension setpoint tension actual value conditioning winding hardness control web break detection Inputs for setpoints Inputs for setpoints speed actual value sensing length computer Diameter computer Inputs outputs Analog inputs outp
39. 2 T400 technology MOGUIG wis icccscscssscsnsiscsicctiecsccsnnseetavarivieansncecteediwesesSeeaeedararss 13 2 1 Communication interfaces sees eee eee ee ee ceceeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeteed 12 2 1 1 Interface to the base drive converter b d 15a sne ceeeteeeeeeeeeeees 14 2 1 2 Interface to COMBOARD b d 15 see ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeee tenne 15 2 1 3 Interface to the peer to peer b d 14 nne ceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeteeeeeenee 16 2 1 4 USS slave interface b d 14a s deeaeeeeneee 18 2 1 5 Interface to the monitor see eee eee eee eee caeeesesaeeeeenaeees 18 2 2 Terminal assignment eee eee eee ee cee eee eee eee e gues 18 2 2 1 Digital inputs ANd outputs sss eee ce eee cee cette e ceeeengeeeeeeeeaes 20 2 2 2 Analog inputs ANd outputs sss sese eee eee Ke 21 22 9 Pulse iee c L TTT 22 3 FUNCTION description HT 24 3 1 ReadiNg in setpoints TTT 25 3 1 1 General information block diagrams 11 13 sese caeeeeseaeeeeesaeees 25 3 1 2 Speed setpoint block diagram 5 sss eee K caaeees 25 K H M n setpoint TTT 25 3 1 2 2 Stretch compensation for a speed setpoint eee eee eee ceeteeeeteee 25 3 1 2 3 Speed setpoint for winder Operation sss esse eee eee Ke 26 3 1 2 4 Velocity setpoint for local Operation sse eee eee eee Kee 27 3 1 2 5 Limiting the velocity setpoint sese cece eee Kee 29 3 1 2 6 Winder overcontrol sss sss sese eee eee e caaeeeeenaaeees 29 3 1 3 Setpoint for the closed loop tension position controller block diagram 7 8 _ 29 3 1 3 1 Winding hardness
40. 2 Value The input for the lower motorized potentiometer 2 command must be connected with Type the application specific source Default B2623 control word 2 3 from CB 1Q1Z_01 B30 1 Input lower motorized potentiometer 1 Value The input for the lower motorized potentiometer 1 command must be connected with Type the application specific source Default B2631 control word 2 11 from CB 1Q1Z_01 B50 1 Input hold diameter Value The input for the hold diameter command must be connected with the application Type specific source Default B2615 control word 2 2 from CB Alternatively B2655 for peer to peer control word 1 15 from PTP 1Q1Z_07 B60 1 Input set velocity setpoint to stop Value The input for the set velocity setpoint command must be connected with the Type application specific source Default B2629 control word 2 9 from CB 1Q1Z_07 B80 1 B2010 B2622 B2630 B2623 B2631 B2615 B2629 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H035 b d 16 H036 b d 16 H037 b d 16 H038 b d 16 H039 b d 16 H040 b d 16 H042 b d 16 Parameters Input winding from below Value The input for the winding from below command must be connected with the Type application specific source Default B2633 control word 2 2 from CB IQ1Z_07 B70 I Input accept setpoint A Value The input for the accept setpoint A command must be
41. 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description H077 Source external dv dt Refer to Chapter 5 H079 Source web width Refer to Chapter 5 H128 Fixed value adapt friction torque gearbox Refer to Chapter 5 stage 2 H138 Source ratio gearbox stage 2 Refer to Chapter 5 The density of the material to be wound is specified as a of the maximum density Friction torque at 0 speed Absolute torque setpoint d331 at n 0 Friction torque at 20 speed Absolute torque setpoint at n 20 Friction torque at 40 speed Absolute torque setpoint at n 40 Friction torque at 60 speed Absolute torque setpoint at n 60 Friction torque at 80 speed Absolute torque setpoint at n 80 Friction torque at 100 speed Table 3 16 Parameters for compensation 3 5 Calculation 3 5 1 Diameter computer block diagram 9a Principle The diameter is computed from the velocity setpoint and the actual motor speed An integrating computation technique is used to generate the smoothest output signal possible The time for a computation interval time for one revolution at Dmin and Vmax is specified using H216 Alternative If the velocity setpoint signal is not available the computation function technique via H277 changes over to an alternative technique which continues to calculate the diameter taking into account the revolutions and material thickness In this case the thickness diameter ratio H286 the initial di
42. 8 Tachometer 17 2 Tension control on 8 21 B2503 Active gearbox ratio 5 8 gt KR0307 Speed act value smoonthed 13 4 absolute speed act value 9b 1 x Min speed for 0 01 H221 H u aft diameter computer HY X lt M 0 005 Enable D computer without v Material thickness d Dmax Initial diameter Setting pulse duration Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 Diameter computer Core diameter 5 1 9b 1 12 5 KR0222 Diameter computer Diameter setting p value 12 7 set D setting The integrating computation technique results in a smoonther output signal D inhibit e With V setpoint signal D Web velocity Speed actual value 0 0 0 _He86 0 4 e Without V setpoint signal D D L 2 Thick 10s H216 320ms Comutation intervall for average value generation time for 1 revolution at Vmax and Dmin H236 o For winders the diameter may only increase For unwinders the diameter may only decrease SAVE KR0310 gt Actual diameter 5 1 7 1 8 1 9b 1 10 5 15 5 Dcore lt Dact lt Dmax 1 0 Eff change time x H238 50s Change time diameter at Vmax and Dmin KR0359 gt Actual diameter before ramp function generator with v KR0358 gt Actual diameter before ramp function generator without v SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet 9a Actual diameter 9a 8 Active gearbox ratio 5 8
43. D Manual 157 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Commissioning the winder Selection T400 or CU corresponds to the diameter of the roll at the machine and that value for which the speed controller should be optimized Generally this is the core diameter and the maximum diameter the largest possible diameter Always check the entered diameter using d310 Adaptation is carried out using a polygon characteristic with 2 points which can be parameterized The variable moment of inertia is the input variable of the characteristic The starting and end points of the appropriate adaptation should be determined H282 can be used to select whether the speed controller is used on the T400 or in the base drive In this case set the Kp adaptation on the appropriate module T400 or CU refer to Chapter 3 4 2 2 7 2 4 1 Setting on the T400 H282 1 Determining H153 Characteristic parameters which should be set Kp min H151 controller gain for an empty roll J 0 0 Kp max H153 controller gain for a full roll Jy start H150 starting point of the adaptation generally at 0 0 Jv end H152 end point of the adaptation generally at 1 0 Use a roll which is as full as possible with the full width and maximum specific weight set the diameter and check at d310 Carry out the optimization routine for the speed controller H153 determined K 1 0 d308 The value for the variable moment of inertia can then also be determined via the measur
44. Default B2501 web break signal IF_CU BinOut I1 Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type B2000 B2000 B2000 B2000 B2000 B2000 B2508 B2000 B2501 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H522 b d 13a H523 b d 13a H524 b d 13a H525 b d 13a H526 b d 13a H531 b d 15a H532 b d 15a H533 b d 15a H534 b d 15a Digital output 2 terminal 47 Vact 0 standstill Digital output 2 can be connected with the application specific source Default B2502 standstill signal IF_CU BinOut I2 Digital output 3 terminal 48 tension controller on Digital output 3 can be connected with the application specific source Default B2503 tension controller on signal IF_CU BinOut I3 Digital output 4 terminal 49 base drive operational Digital output 4 can be connected with the application specific source Default B2504 signal that operation has been enabled IF_CU BinOut 14 Digital output 5 terminal 52 speed setpoint 0 Digital output 5 can be connected with the application specific source Default B2505 signal for speed setpoint 0 IF_CU BinOut I5 Digital output 6 terminal 51 limit value monitor 1 Digital output 6 can be connected with the application specific source Default B2506 signal for limit value mo
45. FREI_BST Kenn_1 X Start point X1 Characteristic 2 abscissa value point 1 FREI_BST Kenn_2 A1 Start point Y1 Characteristic 2 ordinate value point 1 FREI_BST Kenn_2 B1 End point X2 Characteristic 2 abscissa value point 2 FREI_BST Kenn_2 A2 End point Y2 Characteristic 2 ordinate value point 2 FREI BST Kenn 2 62 Input quantity char 21 Characteristic 2 input variable can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI BST Kenn_2 X Input 1 MUL_1 Input 1 for multiplier 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI BST MUL_1 X1 Input 2 MUL_1 Input 2 for multiplier 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI BST MUL_1 X2 Input 1 MUL_2 Input 1 for multiplier 2 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI_BST MUL_2 X1 Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type 0 0 KR0000 R 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 KHO 000 R KR0 000 R KR0000 R KR0 000 R Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H813 b d 23a H814 b d 23b H815 b d 23b H816 b d 23b H820 b d 23a
46. H180 b d 7 H181 b d 7 H182 b d 7 H183 b d 7 H184 b d 7 H185 b d 7 H186 b d 7 H187 b d 7 H188 b d 7 H189 b d 7 114 Enable tension offset compensation The hold diameter control signal can be used when the tension control is switched out to automatically adjust an offset of the tension actual value sensing 0 adjustment inhibited 1 adjustment enabled TENSZ_01 T603 14 Tension reduction 1 Tension reduction 1 for diameter D1 as a of the maximum tension reduction TENSZ_01 T1435 X2 Tension reduction 2 Tension reduction 2 for diameter D2 as a of the maximum tension reduction TENSZ_01 T1445 X2 Tension reduction 3 Tension reduction 3 for diameter D3 as a of the maximum tension reduction TENSZ_01 T1455 X2 Diameter start of tension reduction Diameter for the start of tension reduction TENSZ_01 1T1470 A1 Diameter D1 Diameter D1 for tension reduction 1 TENSZ_01 1T1470 A2 Diameter D2 Diameter D2 for tension reduction 2 TENSZ_01 T1470 A3 Diameter D3 Diameter D2 for tension reduction 3 TENSZ_01 T1470 A4 Diameter D4 end of tension reduction Diameter D4 for the end of tension reduction TENSZ_01 T1466 X Input standstill tension The standstill tension is either entered as parameter value or is parameterized as part of the tension setpoint 0 standstill tension is obtained from H189 tension setpoint Tts standstill tension is entered using H189 TE
47. IQ2Z 01 Anz RAY Output ehar REL BSTKenay Output ehar 2 REL BSTKen SX Output muL REL BSTMULY Output muL REL BSTMUL2Y KR0804 KR0810 KR0812 Output rom H815 FREI BST Fes sw 2Y KR0B16 Output from H816 FREI BST Festsway KR0822 Output ums REL BsTumsay Kross oupuums a REL BST UMS 2Y kRos28 oups FREI BsT uMms 3Y kRosso Output aoo REL BSTADD LY KR0815 E o L TSE KRosi4 OutputtromHeia ERRL BST Festswiy si L L kRosa5 Output suB p O O oO REL BTU kRoss0 output iNT O O O O O FRELBsTnTY poss T oup IUM T ERELL BSTLIMY kRoss3_ Output smoon Teng BSTGaey O B2000 Constant digital output 0 Taz 01 0 B Ausgang Q _ H036 B2001 T Constant digital output 1 1101 1 B AusgangQ _ H047 B2003 Digital input 1 terminal53 TIE CUXeAOLLQH Hoot B2004 Digital input 2 terminas4 IE cu xeaora2 Tunas B2005 Digital input 3 terminal55 SIE cuxeaoras Hong B2006 Digital input 4 terminase TIE cuxeaoroas Hoza g lo lo lo lo B2007 Digita input5 termina sz F cuxeaonas Hows B2008 Digtal input 6 terminals F cuxeaonnas mos B2009 l Digital input 7 teminaso F cuxeanar Hoa B2010 Digita input 8 terminal 60 B2011 Ahematve1 tension controleron iaz orsa B2012 Ahematve2 tension controleron iaz orsa B2013 Digital input 13 terminase F cuBnowor g o g
48. Max 2 0 Type R Value 1 2 Min 2 0 Max 0 0 Type R Value 20000 Min 0 Unit ms Type R Value 0 02 Min 0 Max 2 0 Type R Value 0 10 Min 0 Max 2 0 Type R Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H009 b d 20 H010 b d 20 H011 b d 20 H012 b d 20 H013 b d 17 H014 b d 18 Stall protection threshold control deviation Absolute control error YE of the speed controller which must be exceeded for the fault message stall protection Condition 3 for the stall protection message YE gt H009 Prerequisite The fault is not suppressed CONTZ_01 SU100 L Stall protection response time Time during which conditions 1 3 must simultaneously be present for the stall protection fault message condition 4 for the stall protection message Prerequisite The fault is not suppressed CONTZ_01 SU120 T Alarm mask Bitwise coding of the faults errors which should result in an alarm a bit which is set enables the appropriate alarm also refer to Chapter 8 2 Bit alarm significance 0 A097 overspeed positive 1 A098 overspeed negative 2 A099 overtorque positive 3 A100 overtorque negative 4 A101 stall protection 5 A102 data receive from C U faulted 6 A103 data receive from CB faulted 7 A104 data receive from PTP faulted IF_CU SE030 12 Fault mask Bitwise coding of the faults errors which should result in a fault message a bit
49. Min Max 1Q2Z_01 G310 L Type Hysteresis Value Enters the hysteresis for limit value monitor 2 Min Max 1Q2Z_01 G310 HY Type Select output signal from limit value monitor 2 Value The output signal for limit value monitor 2 can be connected with the application Type specific source e KR0407 input value gt comparison value e KRO0408 input value lt comparison value e KRO0409 input value comparison value e KR0410 input value comparison value s KRO0411 length setpoint reached Default KR0407 input signal gt comparison value 1Q2Z_01 G330 1 Overspeed positive limit Value Upper limit speed actual value as a of the rated speed fault signal and trip at n a lt r Min gt H125 Prerequisite The fault is not suppressed CONTZ_01 SU010 LU Overspeed negative limit Max Type Value Lower limit speed actual value as a of the rated speed fault signal and trip at n ao Min lt H126 Max Prerequisite The fault is not suppressed Type CONTZ_01 SU010 LL Fixed value ratio gearbox stage 2 Value Ratio between gearbox stages 1 and 2 as a Type e g gearbox stage 1 5 1 gearbox stage 2 7 1 H127 Stage stage2 5 7 71 428 0 714 1Q1Z_01 A350 X Fixed value friction torque adaptation factor on gearbox 2 Value Adaptation factor for the friction torque characteristic gearbox stage 2 should be Type adapted for the friction characteristic measurement for the same point
50. Number of pulses per revolution axle mounted tachometer H214 Rated speed winder drive 100 maximum speed at the minimum diameter and maximum web velocity refer to Chapter 5 H217 Operating mode sensing 16 7FC2 encoder signals from the CU via the backplane bus refer to Chapter 5 16 7F02 encoder signals from terminal 72 75 of the T400 P151 CUVC Pulse number shaft same as for H212 refer to Table 6 1 tachometer P353 CUVC Rated speed shaft same as for H214 refer to Table 6 1 tachometer d307 Speed actual value Display parameter Table 3 9 Parameters for the speed actual value sensing Example Pulse encoder at the base drive with 1024 pulses revolution speed at Vmax and core diameter 2347RPM H212 P151 1024 H214 P353 2347 H217 7FC2 Caution Any changes made at H212 H214 and H217 will only become effective after the system has first been powered down and then powered up again Note We recommend that the speed actual value is taken directly from the CU H092 550 as in this case only the parameters in the CU have to be set Otherwise the parameters from T400 H212 H214 and H217 and from the CU P151 and P353 for CUVC must be set as long as the speed controller in CU is used refer to Table 6 1 3 2 2 Speed actual value calibration The speed actual value calibration for the winder must always be executed with the standard gearbox ratio When a velocity setpoint is entered preferably 1 0 without web velocity
51. OR can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant B_output FREI_BST OR_1 11 Value Type Value Type Unit Value Type Value Type Unit Value Type Value Type Unit Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type B2000 ms B2000 ms B2000 ms B2000 B B2001 B2001 B2000 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H877 b d 23b H880 b d 23b H881 b d 23b H883 b d 23b H884 b d 23b H885 b d 23b H886 b d 23b H997 b d 4 d998 b d 4 Input 2 OR_1 Input 2 for the logical OR can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant B_output FREI_BST OR_1 12 Input 1 comp Input 1 H880 is compared with input 2 H881 Input 1 for the numerical comparator can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant R_output FREI_BST Vergl X1 Input 2 comp Input 2 for the numerical comparator can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant R_output FREI_BST Vergl X2 Input smooth Input for the PT1 element smoothing block can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant R_output FREI_BST Glaet X Smoothing time smooth Time constant for the smoothing block PT1 element FREI_BST Glaet T Setting
52. SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 63 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples core diameter Deore 508 mm rated motor output Py 186 kW max web velocity Vmax 339 m min time to accelerate from 0 to V ma th 20 sec deceleration time for a fast stop H220 5 sec max diameter Dmax 1500 mm The following is obtained from equation 1 2 38 77 400 5 8 339 2L ss 63 2 865 508 186 20 R Murs Formula characters and dimensions Refer to Section 4 1 1 4 The following is obtained equation 1 3 H228 5 63 4 0 339 7 63 Formula characters and dimension Refer to Sect 4 1 1 5 For H228 7 63 and an acceleration using a 20 sec ramp at the minimum diameter the inertia compensation generates a torque of 5 63 4 2 2 Determining parameter H227 for the variable moment of inertia Variable moment of The maximum variable moment of inertia is obtained at the maximum inertia diameter and maximum width from equation 10 as follows T Dua K D 32 10 7 1 6 Determining H227 We recommend that the correct value of H227 is determined in two steps 1 Calculate the percentage accelerating torque M 2 for a full roll as a result of the maximum variable moment of inertia J vma Prerequisite D Dmax tp th and Jr 0 64 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples MbV Dm
53. Tension controller 17 8 lt 1 gt For web break Tension controller output gt torque actual value Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 l SIEMENS AG A amp D LD H Tension setpoint tension actual value conditioning winding hardness control web break detection Sheet 7 Tension setpoint after the ramp fct generator 7 8 Suppl tension setpoint 12 3 0 0 H209_ Droop Tension actual value smoothed 7 8 Web break 1 7 8 Operating enable 18 8 Tension controller on 17 8 B2508 Inhibit tension controller 17 8 Compensated web velocity 5 8 ES Actual gt KRO0310 diameter 9a 8 KPmax 0 3 Variable moment of inertia 9b 8 G KPmin 0 3 0 0 __H207 Start of adaption Speed actual value smoothed 13 6 gt KR0307 0 0 _H193 Mnimum value tension controller limits Selection os 2 H194 tension controller limits Time constant Integration time 1000 ms VPI controller 1 0 0 H283 dg i Jl Tension control on 5 1 6 1 7 5 9a 1 13 6 13a 4 18 6 P PI controller 1 0 0 H196 Lower limit web velocity tension contr Pressure act value from the dancer roll 13 3 0 0 Pre control tension for dancer roll operation H208 _ 1 0 End of adaption Upper limit tension controller Adaption 1 0 H195 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 Tension controller XL Setting the control t
54. Up to approx 20 1 for compensation of friction adjustable dancer roll precise dv dt compensation Zax Zmin and dv dt support Winding ratio x tension range Depends heavily on the Up to 100 1 depends dancer roll support essentially on the tension design up to approx actual value signal x a 40 1 Deore Zmin Friction force tension force From experience over the which cannot be compensated compl tension range lt 1 Up to 600 m min for good Up to above 1000 m min Up to 2000 m min for a Web velocity compensation precise dv dt compensation Control concept preferably Sheet steel textile paper Rubber cable wire Paper thin foils Sorting used for textiles foils Ae mes Nip position required W eb tachometer required SS SS SS ee Table 4 3 Comparing various control concepts Dmax S Generally up to 40 1 4 7 Configuring example Winder with indirect tension control Note Fig 4 4 show shows as an example how a winder can be configured with indirect tension control ale Tension setpoint and web velocity setpoint C Machine velocity is entered as analog signal from the automation or as parameter lt 2 gt A pulse encoder as shaft tachometer is used to sense the speed actual value lt 3 gt The diameter computer continually computes the diameter corresponding to the formula l web velocit diameter Mee eee speed lt 4 gt The speed controller receives a speed setpoint which corresponds to the actual web velocity
55. Y 0 0 FREI BST ADD_1 X1 Input 2 ADD_1 Input 2 for adder 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI BST ADD_1 X2 Input 1 SUB_1 Input 1 for subtractor 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI BST SUB_1 X1 Input 2 SUB_1 Input 2 for multiplier 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI_BST SUB_1 X2 Input INT Input quantity for the integrator can be an application specific constant value FREI_BST INT X Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type B2000 KR0 000 R KRO 000 R B 2000 KRO 000 R KR0 000 R KHO 000 R KR0 000 R 0 0 R Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H851 b d 23b H852 b d 23b H853 b d 23b H854 b d 23b H855 b d 23a H856 b d 23b H857 b d 23b H858 b d 23b H860 b d 23b H861 b d 23b Upper limit value INT Upper limit of the integrator FREI_BST INT LU Lower limit value INT Lower limit of the integrator FREI_BST INT LL Integrating time INT Integrating time constant of the integrator FREI_BST INT TI Setting value INT The setting value input for the integrator can be co
56. active gt F123 Bit 8 15 0 IF_CU SU170 QS Correction factor material density DIAMZ_07 P290 Y Compensated web velocity SREFZ_01 S170 Y Actual saturation setpoint SREFZ_01 S397 Y Positive torque limit SREFZ_07 NC005 Y Negative torque limit SREFZ_07 NC006 Y Type Type Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 d344 b d 5 d345 b d 6a d346 b d 8 d349 b d 13 d350 b d 13 d352 to d356 b d 4 H400 b d 12 H401 b d 13 H402 b d 13 d403 b d 10 d404 b d 10 Velocity setpoint SREFZ_07 S490 Y Actual Kp speed controller from T400 SREFZ_07 NC035 Y Actual Kp tension controller TENSZ_01 T1770 Y Velocity actual value connection tachometer 1Q1Z_01 A1329 Y Braking distance Output in m DIAMZ_07 W92 Y CPU utilization T1 to T5 Processor utilization of the standard software sub divided according to time sectors T1 is the fastest highest priority T5 the slowest time sector It is important that no time sector is utilized more than 100 corresponding to 1 0 as otherwise it will not be processed in the configured time intervals d352 CPU utilization of T1 2ms d353 CPU utilization of T2 8ms d354 CPU utilization of T3 16ms d355 CPU utilization of T4 32ms d356 CPU utilization of T5 128ms IF_CU CPU Auslast Y1
57. b d 9b d340 b d 5 d341 b d 5 d342 b d 6 d343 b d 6 130 Status word 2 Bit 0 System start 1 active Bit 1 Local stop 1 active Bit 2 OFF3 0 active Bit 3 Local run mode 1 active Bit 4 Local crawl mod e 1 active Bit 5 Local inching forwards mode 1 active Bit 6 Local inching backwards mode 1 active Bit 7 Local positioning mode 1 active Bit 8 Speed setpoint is zero 1 active Bit 9 W eb break 1 active Bit 10 Tension control on 1 active Bit 11 System operation mode 1 active Bit 12 Standstill 1 active Bit 13 Limit value monitor 1 output 1 active Bit 14 Limit value monitor 2 output 1 active Bit 15 Local operator control 1 active CONTZ_01 C245 QS Alarms from T400 Bit 0 Overspeed positive 1 active A097 Bit 1 Overspeed negative 1 active A098 Bit 2 Overtorque p ositive 1 active A099 Bit 3 Overtorque negative 1 active A100 Bit 4 Drive stalled 1 active A101 Bit 5 Receive CU faulted 1 active A102 Bit 6 Receive CB faulted 1 active A103 Bit 7 Receive PTP faulted 1 active A104 Bit 8 15 0 IF_CU SU150 QS Faults from T400 Bit 0 Overspeed positive 1 active F116 Bit 1 Overspeed negative 1 active gt F117 Bit 2 Overtorque positive 1 activie F118 Bit 3 Overtorque negative 1 active gt F119 Bit 4 Drive stalled 1 active F120 Bit 5 Receive CU faulted 1 active F121 Bit 6 Receive CB faulted 1 active F122 Bit 7 Receive PTP faulted 1
58. be connected at the serial interface X01 RS232 This then allows all connectors to be viewed and changed Further connection changes are possible not using SIMOVIS The baud rate is as standard 19200 baud Terminal designation R sean Table 2 8 Terminals of interface X01 on T400 2 2 Terminal assignment Control signals and setpoints can be read in and status signals and actual values output via digital and analog channels For T400 the plant signals are connected directly at appropriate terminals which are accessible from the front An overview of the T400 connections is shown in Fig 2 2 The subsequent description of the terminal assignment refers to this Fig For additional information regarding T400 refer to Lit 1 5 18 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 HTL Pulse encoder c g2 Track B Cr lt 83 Zero puls 80 45V 100mA 81 Track A Pulse encod Coarse pi T400 technology module T400 Tracks A and B from CU MASTER DRIVES or DC MASTER Basic drive 1 Rl 62 Track A HTU 7 63 Track B4 TTL 0 pulse RS422 Wes Coarse p Pulse Selected with d switch S2 encod 66l 12 5 analog inputs differential inputs 11 bits sign 10V 10kQ 4 binary outputs bi directional 24V DC 8mA input current 4 binary inputs alarm capable 24V DC 8mA input current L C 4 binary i
59. circumferential velocity constant Concept With this control concept the material web velocity must be detected H203 3 amp H195 lt 0 using a web tachometer so that the diameter can be computed The 7 speed controller regulates the current controller in the drive The pre control torque is added as a supplementary torque setpoint after the speed controller The closed loop constant v control is explained in more detail in Chapter 4 13 using a configuring example Caution The web break detection is not effective for the closed loop v constant control 4 6 5 Selecting a suitable control concept The most important criteria to select a suitable control concept are summarized in Table 4 3 Control concept Indirect tension control Direct tension control Direct tension control with Constant v with dancer roll tension transducer control Information on the tension Tension actual value Intervenes in the web Sensitive to overload actual value sensing sensing not required routing material storage generally does not intervene capability in the web routing 70 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples Winding ratio Up to approx 10 1 good From experience up to From experience up to dv dt and friction approx 15 1 approx 15 1 precise dv dt Dmax Deore compensation required compensation required Tension range Up to approx 6 1 for good Can only be changed for
60. connected with the Type application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output 0 1Q1Z_07 B90 1 Input accept setpoint B Value The input for the accept setpoint B command must be connected with the Type application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output 0 1Q1Z_07 B100 1 Input local inching forwards Value The input for the local inching forwards command must be connected with the Type application specific source Default B2608 control word 1 8 from CB Alternatively e B2648 from peer to peer control word 1 8 from PTP 1Q1Z_07 B120 1 Input local crawl Value The input for the local crawl command must be connected with the application Type specific source Default B2627 control word 2 7 from CB 1Q1Z_07 B110 1 Input local inching backwards Value The input for the local inching backwards command must be connected with the Type application specific source Default B2609 control word 1 9 from CB Alternatively e B2649 for peer to peer control word 1 9 from PTP 1Q1Z_07 B130 1 Input gearbox stage 2 Value The input for the changeover to gearbox stage 2 must be connected with the Type application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output 0 1Q1Z_07 B160 1 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 B2633 B2000 B2000 B2608 B2627 B2609 B2000 B 99 Parameters H043 b d 16 H044 b d
61. controller output d313 in standard operation 0 0 web stretch for torque limiting control the output moves between the torque setpoint and 0 0 dependent on the friction compensation 7 2 7 Setting the saturation setpoint H145 Note for speed correction control H145 0 0 for torque limiting control H145 0 03 0 10 The value should be selected so that the speed controller is always at its limit under normal operating conditions The speed controller only leaves its limit when the web breaks thus preventing the winder from accelerating to inadmissible high speeds for unwinder it is practical if a low overcontrol value is selected This means that the tension controller can then always be directly switched in even if there is slack in the material web The drive slowly rotates backwards tensioning the material web 7 2 8 Setting the braking characteristic H256 259 Braking The braking characteristic is used to shutdown the drive without any characteristic overshoot for fast stop OFF3 In this case the braking torque is limited to a maximum value H259 If the drive falls below a specific speed H258 the braking torque is reduced until it has reached a lower value H257 at an additional speed H256 This measure means that a high braking torque can be achieved and also aclean shutdown in the vicinity of zero speed Effectiveness Variable moments of inertia for winder drives are handled by setting the
62. ela aa 92 5 2 Parameter lists E A cete ie E tab t A cote ale E a tat et A coca ue tia td 93 6 Base drive parameters iis sciesieiets ciasieieneutinnsds soccanvavaniesdessataneboen asnsantenenie 148 4 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Warning information 7 Commissioning the winder cccssseeeeeeeeses resser essere essen see 150 7 1 Information ON COMMISSIONING sss sese eee eee Kee eee eee eeessaaeeessnaaeees 150 7 1 1 Resources used for adaptation and commissioning sss eee eee eee ee eee 151 7 1 2 Specification of the parameter numbers eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenes 151 7 1 3 BICO technology sese eee eee eee K secaeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeteeaes 152 7 1 4 Establishing the factory setting eee eee eee Kee aeeeteaas 153 7 2 Commissioning the winder functions sese eee eee eee Kee ceeeeeeenes 154 7 2 1 Checking the speed actual value Calibration sse eee eee eee ee 154 7 2 2 Compensation friction torque block diagram 9b sss sees eee eee 154 7 2 2 1 Friction Characteristic see eee ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ceeeeeeaes 155 7 2 3 Compensating the accelerating torque block diagram 9b sss eee eee 156 7 2 3 1 Constant moment of inertia H228 sse cesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 156 7 2 3 2 Variable moment of inertia H227 sss ceeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeenes 157 7 2 4 Setting the Kp adaptation for the speed control sees ee 157 7 2 4 1 Setting on the T400 sse cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ceeeeeneaaes 1
63. fomes F comsoza2 ho B2602 l Controlword 12 tomes F comsozas moss B2603 l Controlword 13 fomes E comBozaa l Inverter enable B2604 Controlword 14 fromc F comsozas mos B2605 Control word 1 5 from CB B2600 Controlword 1 6 fomes F comsozaz moso B2607 Controlword 1 7 fomes IF_comBoz as Acknowledge taut _ B2608 Controlword 1 8 fomes F comsozas Hoss B2609 Controlword 1 9 fomes F comsozaro ogo B2610 Controlword 1 10 romes F comBozan Gargan PLC B2611 l Controlword 1 11 tomes F comBozar2 Tension controler on B2612 l Controlword 1 12 romes GOR aI Tens control inhibit B2613 Controlword 1 13 tomes F comsozars hos B2614 l Controlword 1 14 romes IF comBoza15 Setdiameter B2615 Controlword 1 15 tomes F comsozars hoss B2620 Controlword 2 0 fromc IF comBosar Enter v_suppl _set_ B2621 Controlword 2 1 tomes E GOR Gs Local positioning B2622 Controlword2 2 tomes F comBosas ozo B2623 Controlword2 3 tomes F comsosaa hon B2624 Controlword2 4 fomes IF COM B09 05 Local op contei B2625 Controlword2 5 tomes E COMBOS Q6 l Laan B2628 Controlword2 6 tomes F comsosa7 Hose B2627 Controlword2 7 tomes F comsosas mos Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 179 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Appendix B2628 Control word 2 8 from CB IF _COM B09 Q9 B2629 Controlword 2 9 tomeg F COMBOG QIO Hos
64. increase the speed by the saturation setpoint the speed controller output goes to the entered torque limit due to the selected tension setpoint The tension actual value is entered as an analog signal at terminals 94 99 Under certain circumstances it may be necessary to provide external smoothing refer to Fig 4 14 When the web breaks or the material web sags the speed controller automatically takes over drive control and moves away from the negative torque limit The winder is braked and rotates with the velocity parameterized at H145 in the opposite direction to the winding direction The drive can also be shutdown and the diameter computer inhibited by appropriately parameterizing the web break detection and evaluating the web break signal also refer to Chapter 3 6 1 The tension setpoint is connected to the setpoint input of the tension controller and simultaneously controls the torque setpoint pre control The tension and torque setpoints can be adjusted for the pre control using H200 Normally decreasing winding hardness for unwinder is not required and the characteristic can be disabled with H206 1 The tension controller compares the tension actual value under certain circumstances smoothed through a filter with the tension setpoint and outputs an appropriate correction signal The tension controller output signal and the parameterized pre controlled value are added and after multiplication with the actual diameter
65. means that parameters specify a fixed value at an input whereby BICO parameters select the signal source which is connected with the input This signal source must be defined in the Fig 7 1 Caution The source and destination of a BICO connection must have the same data type Thus there are different symbols for connectors and BICO inputs in the function charts for each data type used BICO parameter Name of the BICO Connector number Connector P input name Connection from S enable Number of the 0123 connected connectors BOOLean values Status bit_XY factory setting Data type symbol S control word Diagram sector of the L430 2541 source for the factory 16 bit values PZD_123 K 200 8 setting S double word P501 5021 32 bit values KK5021 gt CU_DoubleXY KK 60 2 S Speed actual vaue L321 3155 Floating point values KR3155 J Speed KR 330 1 Connectors BICO inputs Fig 7 1 Symbols for connectors and BICO inputs 152 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Commissioning the winder 7 1 4 Establishing the factory setting Applications Parameterization Establish factory setting is not required for a standard start up as the SPW 420 is shipped on the T400 with the factory setting The factory setting can be re established if there is for example uncertainty about the parameterization or it is not possible to change any more parameters
66. moment of inertia sese eee eee 64 4 3 Selecting the winding ratio winding range sss sees eee eee ee eee eee 66 4 4 POWGr ANG eT 66 4 5 Defining the Sigh ssw cept ett eed SE ee ee eee 66 4 6 Selecting the closed loop Control concept sse eee ee eee eee K tees 68 4 6 1 Indirect closed loop tension control Open loop tension contra eee 68 4 6 2 Direct closed loop tension control with dancer roll sss eee eee ceeeeeeeseaaes 69 4 6 3 Direct closed loop tension control with a tension transducer sese eee eee eee 70 4 6 4 Closed loop constant v Control sese K deneeeeneed 70 4 6 5 Selecting a suitable Control concept see eee eee ceeeeceeeesstaeeesessaeeeesta tees 70 4 7 Configuring example Winder with indirect tension Control sse sese eee eee eee 71 4 8 Configuring example Unwinder with indirect tension Control sese esse eee eee Kee 74 4 9 Configuring example Winder with dancer roll speed correction sese ee eee 77 4 10 Configuring example Unwinder with dancer roll speed Correction sese eee eee 80 4 11 Configuring example Winder with tension transducer sss sese eee eee ee Kee eee 83 4 12 Configuring example Unwinder with tension transducer sss sees eee eee eee 86 4 13 Configuring example Winder with closed loop constant v control sss sese eee eee 89 4 14 Configuring example Cut tension with freely assignable DIOCKS sese eee eee eee eee 91 8 Te T L E 92 5 1 Parameter hand ling s vcctace satis uliatwere csi a ees Gace eaten
67. monitors can be freely connected Presently the output of limit value monitor 1 B 2506 is pre assigned to terminal 51 digital output 6 H526 Parameter Parameter Parameter name Explanation GWM 1 GWM 2 H107 H115 Input value for the limit value Source d301 d350 monitor en hemon outs Cd Table 3 20 Parameters for the limit value monitors 3 6 3 Analog outputs block diagram 10 Freely connectable The T400 has 2 analog outputs These are pre assigned but can be freely connected for display parameters and several other values using BICO technology Pre assignment The torque setpoint speed controller output is output at terminals 97 99 H098 An offset is added using H101 and a multiplication factor applied using H10 2 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 53 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description The actual diameter is output at terminals 98 99 H103 An offset is added using H099 and a multiplication factor applied using H10 0 Note All of the analog outputs are normalized as standard so that an internal value of 1 0 represents a voltage of 10 V Additional normalization functions are realized using parameters H099 to H102 H098 Analog output 2 terminal 98 99 diameter actual value Refer to Chapter 5 H099 Analog output 2 offset Refer to Chapter 5 Table 3 21 Parameters for the analog outputs 3 6 4 Overspeed block diagram 20 Undesirable operating statuses of the drive are prevente
68. must be enabled For the closed loop torque limiting control H203 0 1 2 the difference referred to the tension controller output from the torque Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 51 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description actual value minus the tension controller output must be less than the value in H275 The limit for the torque tension actual value set using H204 must be fallen below and the setpoint must be above this limit For indirect closed loop tension control H203 0 this limit value refers to the torque actual value for all other control types to the tension actual value The time delay set using H205 must have expired it is essentially used to suppress incorrect signals if the actual values are not steady An external web break signal can be connected using parameter H253 via a digital input The web break signal is available at terminal 46 It can be used to control a 24 V relay or contactor Internal response H178 is used to activate the internal response of the winder software to the web break signal For H178 1 the web break signal is saved the diameter computer is inhibited in order to prevent incorrect values being computed Furthermore the tension control is disabled and the winder continues to run with a specified web velocity The storage must be acknowledged by withdrawing the control command Tension controller on H022 For H178 0 the web break is just signaled
69. oO Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 171 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Appendix H206 _ Select winding hardness characteristic _ TENSZo1Tia751 fo H207 _ Start of adaptation tension controler TENSZO1TI770A1 foo H209 Droop tension controller TENSZ ON TIT9BXI Joo H211 Select web tachometer DIAZ 1 11051 Jo IF_CU D901 MOD H224 material thickness DIAZ ozP25x 0 H225 Fine calibration avot DIAZ on P5002 0 H226 l inputawet AZ orto fo H227 Variable moment of inertia DIAZ on Pagaxt foo H228 Constant moment of nans DIAMZ opaa foo H229 Input adaptation factor friction torque gearbox DIAMZ_07 P915 X2 KR0128 fae stage 2 H230 Friction torque speed 0 DIAMZ_07 P910 B1 H231 Friction torque speed 20 DIAMZ_07 P910 B2 looo H232 Friction torque speed 40 DIAMZ_07 P910 B3 looo H235 Friction torque speed 100 DIAZ oz Pooox foo R H236 Diameter change monotone DIAZ LBI Jo l H237 Pre controlwithn BANS ozposox2e Joo R Rated velocity for the braking distance computer H250 eEEPRomkey conz ourapkey fo Smoothing time for_Av H255 Adaptation tactor av TRANG onpas x2 foo 172 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Appendix Sg Reduced braking torque SREFZO7 BDIOBI foo H267 _ Select operating mode mot potentiometer Jigs ormon fo 8 ms H275 Response threshold web break monitoring TeNSz o7 T2080m__ ozs R H277 _ Enable D calculation
70. obtained according to Table 4 1 and Table 4 2 for the velocity setpoint if a forwards and backwards direction is required a negative value can be assigned for the backwards operation Note The specified polarities apply to both the T400 module and the base drive Caution e For an indirect tension control and tension control with tension transducer the tension setpoint is always positive display parameter d304 e For position control e g dancer roll the position reference value is 0 0 or positive display parameter d304 Operating modes The following winding types are possible The definitions for the polarity of speed torque and velocity for various operating modes are indicated in Table 4 1 The definition of the signs for each winding type are listed in Table 4 2 Winding type A Winding type B Winding type C Winding type D Winder Winder Unwinder Unwinder winding from above winding from below winding from above winding from below Control signal level Control signal level Control signal level Control signal level winder 1 winder 1 winder 0 winder 0 winding from below 0 winding from below 1 winding from below 0 winding from below 1 Table 4 1 Defining the winding types and the appropriate control signals for winders selected using H043 and winding from below selected with H035 Winder Speed actual Saturation Torque setpoint Direct tension control indirect Position control type value setpoint actual 0329 wit
71. of the CRV receive block as indication information for the fault message F122 or A103 IF_COM Empf_COM YTS ext status word The external status word is used to generate status word 1 from T400 Chapter s K 4549 status word 1 from CU if T400 is inserted in the drive converter e K 4498 fixed status word for SRT400 solution Default K4549 status word 1 from CU CONTZ_01 SE110 11 Min 2 0 Max 2 0 Type R Min 2 0 Max 2 0 Type R Min 2 0 Max 2 0 Type R Min 2 0 Max 2 0 Type R Min 2 0 Max 2 0 Type R Min 2 0 Max 2 0 Type R Value 20000 Min 0 Unit ms Type R Value 19920 Min 0 Unit ms Type R Type W Value K4549 Type W Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H500 b d 15a H501 b d 15a H502 b d 15a H503 b d 15a H504 b d 15a H505 b d 15a H506 b d 15a H510 b d 15a H511 b d 15a H512 b d 15a Setpoint W2 at CU Send word 2 at CU is connected to the fixed connector KR0303 speed setpoint IF_CU Sollwert_W2 X Setpoint W5 at CU Send word 5 at CU is connected to the fixed connector KR0558 torque supplementary setpoint IF_CU Sollwert_W5 X Setpoint W6 at CU Send word 6 at CU is connected to the fixed connector KR0556 positive torque limit IF_CU Sollwert_W6 X Setpoint W7 at CU Send word 7 at CU is connected to the fixed connector KR0557 negative torque limit IF_
72. plus the saturation setpoint H145 lt 6 gt set H145 to approx 0 05 0 1 Overcontrol means that the speed controller is overcontrolled when the material web is present lt 7 gt i e it goes to its positive output limit When an attempt is made to increase the shaft speed by the saturation setpoint the speed controller output reaches the specified torque limit B lt 8 gt due to the selected tension setpoint lt 8 gt Thus the tension setpoint specifies the torque setpoint for the current controller by appropriately controlling torque limit B Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 71 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples The core function of the indirect tension control is that the tension setpoint multiplied with the normalized diameter D is entered as torque max diameter and max tension setpoint results in the max torque lt 9 gt lt 10 gt In order that the entered torque results in as far as possible the required material tension it is necessary to precisely compensate the friction and accelerating torques which must be additionally overcome The friction torque always acts in the direction of rotation and the inertia compensation has a braking effective when decelerating and an accelerating effect when accelerating lt 11 gt When the material web breaks or the web sags the speed controller intervenes and prevents the winder drive from accelerating up to an inadmissible speed b
73. port RAM interface The process data i e the setpoints and actual values are cyclically written and read by the technology module and base drive Parameters are read and changed task controlled Base drive setting The base drive must be commissioned In order to operate the standard SPW 420 software package the following parameters must be set on the base drive for the setpoint actual value channels and control status words refer to Table 2 1 Table 2 2 and Chapter 6 NOTE In Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 Pxxx Base drive parameters Hxxx T400 parameter Setpoint channels The technology module transfers 10 words to the base drive 8 of these words are defined as in Table 2 1 The other 2 words can be freely T400 gt CU connected The control word transferred is generated by the automation higher level open loop control data transfer via the interface module or from the T400 terminals and fixed values KA lini he param param param T400 e e Source for contol word Jf Cd GAG 9 Source for control word 2__ Word 1 0 S P555 Ps555 Pess 3101 TOS Wad 16ms P558 _ Ps58 Pess 3102 Offs Wod12 jiems P561 P561 Pe6ei 3103 Pulseenable Word13 16ms P565 _ P565 Pee5 3107 Acknowledge faut Wad 1 7 iems __ P575 P575 Pe75 3115 _ External faut Word115 iems __ LT 3009 H505 E Word 10 H506 Table 2 1 Control word and setpoint channel from the T400 to the base drive Act value The tec
74. potentiometer 2 fast change The fast change starts if the raise or lower control commands are present for longer than 4s H264 Motorized pot 2 standard change Ramp up and ramp down times 38 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description H269 Ramp time ramp funct gen operat Refer to Chapter 5 d305 Output motorized potentiometer 1 Display parameter d306 Output motorized potentiometer 2 Display parameter Table 3 11 Parameters for the motorized potentiometer functions 3 3 6 Splice control block diagram 21 Purpose The splice logic allows the drive functions to be controlled for a flying roll change The closed loop tension control fast stop reverse winding after a splice and synchronization are implemented on the T400 The sequence control for the automatic splice functions mechanical rotation power up commands for synchronizing and splicing controlling the glue roll and knife must be realized in a PLC control Sequence The splice control is activated via H148 reverse winding time as soon as a value not equal to zero is entered there Further the Tension controller on command H022 must be set to one of the other two connections B2011 B2012 refer to block diagram 17 dependent on whether the command to switch in the tension controller is received from the terminal or via a control bit When splicing only the splice enable signal is used to activate the ten
75. refer to Chapter 3 1 2 5 The tension in the material web can establish itself after the tension control has been switched in An unwinder might have to go into the motoring mode if the accelerating torque when braking is greater than the tension torque Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples Torque p Characteristic D core Unwinding s T n t o W eb break H145 Fig 4 5 Torque speed characteristic Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 75 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples Nip position D a Zset lt 1 gt V set lt 1 gt MII Tachometer lt 2 gt V set post D rt sts scrssss P Oe S a 5 I I i ract xX l R Diameter I l computer 9 lt 3 gt i B V set l D T400 l lt n I I p D nact W idth l i Casson i y I I lt 12 gt Saturation setpoint s E Compen I l sations z I l q D a S 5 l I s 5 I l Variable moment V set N N of inertia nsety D I I S I I Speed setpoint z d P443 3002 I I ae a a I EEN Re ES Wed Cen a ene ee ey A I Torque actual value i 7 S K p adaption 5 N a L Speed controller l P232 3008 B Positive torque I I I s I limit P493 3006 i E i E B 1 Negative torque Z I S I l I N lim it P499 3007 Winder from above or IES unwinder from below P gt A T I Fi
76. setpoint 8 5 Xho z x l Variable moment V set lt 9 gt of inertia nset D l lt 10 gt Speed setpoint P443 3002 P734 06 24 G P734 02 148 K p adaption l E S L Pal L Speed controller l 4 P232 3008 B Positive torque lim it P493 3006 x A i E l 1 0 B 4 Niegative torque limit P499 3007 Winder from above or S unwinder from below Pa p ee rw ee ne ee ee A l I CUY C L NZ l Current controller L 2 I Fig 4 4 Example for a winder with indirect tension control 3 refer to 3 in the block diagram lt 2 gt Information in the text Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 73 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples 4 8 Configuring example Unwinder with indirect tension control Note lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 8 gt lt 9 gt lt 10 gt lt 12 gt Threading the material web Note 74 An example is shown in Fig 4 6 as to how an unwinder with indirect tension control can be configured Tension setpoint and web velocity setpoint Machine velocity are entered as analog signals from the automation or as parameter A pulse encoder as shaft tachometer is used for the speed actual value sensing The diameter computer continually computes the diameter corresponding to the above formula web velocit diameter a eee speed While unwinding the speed controller
77. the application specific source Default KRO086 output from H086 fixed value b d 12 1Q1Z_01 Al290 X H088 Fixed value diameter setting value Value 0 1 Enters a fixed value as technology parameter Min 2 0 Max 2 0 b d 12 IQ1Z_01 AI300A X Type R 104 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H089 b d 12 H090 b d 12 H091 b d 12 H092 b d 13 H093 b d 13 H094 b d 13 H095 b d 13 H096 b d 13 Input diameter setting value The input for the diameter setting value must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0088 output from H088 fixed value Alternatively e KR0222 output from H222 core diameter IQ1Z_01 AI300 X Fixed value positioning setpoint Enters a fixed value as technology parameter IQ1Z_01 AI310A X Input positioning setpoint The input for the setpoint for the local positioning mode must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0090 output from H090 fixed value 1Q1Z_01 Al310 X Input speed actual value The input for the speed actual value must be connected with the application specific source Default KRO550 n_act from CU 1Q1Z_01 AI320 X Input velocity actual value connection tachometer The input for a connection tachometer velocity actual value must be connected with the application specific source This input can be active with the bit selected using H013 and can be effectiv
78. the lefthand slot O K time controlled using function block DRIVE Table 8 2 Diagnostics using the yellow LED Green LED This flashes if the T400 is communicating with the communications module CBP CB1 SCB1 SCB2 164 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Diagnostic LEDs alarms faults The green LED does not flash if in order to operate the axial winder a communications module is either not required or is not available In the CU flashes Corresponds to the sampling time data transfer to COMBOARD O K controlled using function block DRIVE In the SRT400 data transfer to T400 at the righthand slot O K Corresponds to the sampling time In the SRT400 constant off Table 8 3 Diagnostics using the green LED 8 2 Alarms and faults of the axial winder Messages The alarms A097 A104 and faults F116 F123 generated by the on CUx SPW 420 are described in the following Table 8 4 Alarm No Fault No Significance Suppression bit H011 and H012 A097 F116 Overspeed positive lO A098 F117 Overspeed negative aoo mo frn onora neoa o 7 Table 8 4 Alarms and faults from SPW420 Suppression The alarms and faults are as described in H011 and H012 coded bitwise By setting the associated bit 1 the associated alarm or fault is enabled and by deleting 0 inhibited Example Operation without communications module and peer to peer link In H011 H012 bits 6 and 7 must be s
79. to the variable moment of inertia on the T400 or in the drive converter using a polygon curve which can be parameterized The quantity is the calculated variable moment of inertia the output acts on the proportional gain of the controller on the T400 or in the drive converter depending on the setting of parameter H282 The starting and end points of the adaptation should be set together with the associated controller gains The characteristic is linearly interpolated between these two points Parameterization The Kp values for a full and an empty reel are required for the correct setting These are determined at start up when the drive is being commissioned Setting parameters Kp min H151 Controller gain for an empty roll Kp max H153 Controller gain for a full roll Jy start H150 Starting point of adaptation generally at 0 0 Jv end H152 End point of adaptation generally at 1 0 On the T400 When determining the controller gain with as far as possible a full reel the associated variable moment of inertia can be read as visualization parameter d308 or can be calculated using the known diameter The following is valid for gearbox stage 1 material density and width J D Deore The value entered as H153 must be referred to 100 Jy i e H282 1 Kp max determined K 100 determined J For the basic winder setting with H151 H153 adaptation is disabled The actual adaptation value is displayed u
80. torque limit SREFZ_07 NC003 X2 KR0313 H650 Enable free_blocks 1Q1Z_01 B04 1 H800 Start point X1 FREI BST Kenn_1 A1 0 0 R 174 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Appendix H801__ Start point Y1 FREI BST Kenn 1 B1 oo o fR H802 End point x2 EREI BST Kenn 1 A2 ho o R H803 End point Y2 FREI_BST Kenn_1 B2 H804 Input quantity char_1 FREI BST Kenn 1 X KR0000 R e H805 Start point X1 FREI_BST Kenn_2 A1 H806 Start point Y1 FREI BRT benn 2 B1 oo o R O H807 End point x2 EREI BST Kenn 2 A2 ho o R H808 endpoity2 REL BSTKerm 2B2 fo H812 Input 1 MUL 2 FREI BST MUL_2 X1 KRO000 H813 Input 2 MUL 2 FREI BST MUL_2 X2 KR0000 H814 Fixed setpoint_1 FREI BST Fest_SW_1 X H815 Fixed setpoint_2 FREI_BST Fest_SW_2 X looo sd H816 Fixed setpoint_3 FREI_BST Fest_SW_3 X H820 Input 1 UMS_1 FREI_BST UMS_1 X1 KR0000 H821 Input 2 UMS_1 FREI _BST UMS_1 X2 KR0000 H822 Switch signal UMS_1 FREI BST UMS_1 1 B2000 FRELBSTINTX foo H823 Input 1 UMS_2 FREI BST UMS_2 X1 KR0000 H850 Input INT FREI_BST INT X oms H856 Input LIM FREI_BST LIM X KR0000 H857 Upper limit value LIM FREI_BST LIM LU KR0000 H855 Set INT FREI_BST INT S B2000 H858 Lower limit value LIM FREI_BST LIM LL KR0000 H860 Input EinV FREI_BST EinV l B2000 H861 Delay time EinV FREI_BST EinV T H862 Input AusV FREI BST AusV B2000 H863 Delay time AusV FREI BST AusV T Oms H864 Input
81. torque referred to the motor shaft Nm accelerating torque referred to the motor shaft Nm percentage accelerating torque as a result of the fixed moment of inertia J p at the minimum diameter of My refer to formula 1 2 percentage accelerating torque as a result of the variable moment of inertia J y at the maximum diameter and maximum width of M vl refer to formula 1 5 rated motor torque Nm refer to equation1 3 speed RPM maximum motor speed RPM no load speed at maximum field weakening rated motor speed at rated voltage and rated motor field current RPM power required for acceleration kW required motor power kW rated motor output kW winding power kW winding ratio refer to 1 specific weight kg dm material density kg m winding time s accelerating time s time to accelerate up to the web velocity f 0 to V max S web velocity m min max web velocity m min tension N velocity difference m min 61 Configuring instructions and examples 4 2 Calculating the inertia compensation Principle When accelerating and braking the standard axial winder software package computes the required accelerating torque 1 1 and controls it to the required torque block diagram 9 b so that the tension torque is kept as constant as possible The winder software can compute the acceleration dv dt or this can also be entered externally The moment of inertia J is
82. value of 1 0 corresponds display parameter d311 select the tension setpoint using H081 calibrate to 1 0 for the maximum tension setpoint A supplementary tension setpoint can be selected using H083 and this is added after the ramp function generator for the main setpoint Display parameter for the total setpoint d304 parameterize the ramp function generator for the tension setpoint using H175 and H176 Example Tension actual value at terminals 94 99 maximum value 9 V Calibration 9V corresponds to 1 0 gt H054 10V 9V 1 11 For dancer roll For dancer roll control enter a fixed position reference value at H080 with the standard connection from KR0081 the setpoint corresponds to the center dancer roll position When the winding hardness characteristic is used as output signal for dancer roll support the main setpoint is disconnected with H244 1 and the position reference value is entered via supplementary setpoint with H082 and H083 the range for the analog dancer roll position input voltage is normalized to 1 0 at maximum voltage Example 10V voltage range 5V dancer roll center voltage actual value at terminals 94 99 OV when the dancer is at the bottom and 10V when the dancer roll is at the top A winder runs too quickly if the actual value gt 5V and too slowly for actual values lt 5V for unwinder this is the other way round The position reference value H080 is set to 0 5 the normalization of
83. version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Torque limiting supplementary torque setpoint standstill identification Sheet 6 KR0329 gt Smoothing 500 ms Torque setpoint 10 5 A KR0331 gt g Torque setpoint 3 8 15a 7 Torque setpoint smoothed No OFF3 17 4 Speed controller S x gt e Speed actual value ao smoothed 13 6 KR0303 Speed setpoint 6 8 KR0303 0 0 Upper limit 1 0 H290_ Positive torque limit 6 8 K KR0556 H291 Negative torque limit 6 8 KRO557 Lower limit 1 0 Ramp Uptime 1000 ms NER anete 300ms H294 uppl torque setpoint 6 8 __ H293 Ramp Downtime 1000 ms KP adaption KP adaptation max 0 1 H153 KR0345 gt Variable moment of inertia 9b 8 KR0308 Kp adaptation on T400 KP adaptation min 0 1 H151 Start of adaption End of adaption Operation enable 18 8 B2508 D Speed controller changeover 0 H282_ to CU or T400 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LDR Speed controller on the T400 Sheet 6a 4 J Ly Tension setpoint after the ramp fct generator 8 1 Tension setpoint 12 3 __ Tension act Standstill 6 8 value 7 8 G K an B2502 pper limit 1 o Lower limit 0 with without PON Standstill tension Ramp up time 10000 ms H175 winding hardness characteristic on 17 2 Ramp down time 10000 ms H176 o H188 l Tension control b TL Source standstill
84. word 1 to CU Parameter name SZ H500 303 6 8 Speed setpoint KR0303 gt KR T G he M N G iS G Vo ALLEY Word 2 Setpoint W2 to CU B H512 2000 Control word 2 0 to CU Word 3 Control word 2 1 to CU H513 2000 Word 4 Control word 2 to CU H501 558 6 8 Supplementary torque setpoint KR0558 gt KR Control word 2 3 to CU H502 556 Control word 2 4 to CU 6 5 Output from pos torque limit KR0556 gt KR gt gt gt Word 7 Setpoint W7 to CU H503 557 control word 2 2 to CU Words Setpoint W5 to CU H514 2000 Word 6 Setpoint W6 to CU H515 2000 Control word 2 5 to CU 6 5 Output neg torque limit KR0557 gt KR Word 8 Setpoint W8 to CU control word 2 6 to CU H504 308 gt Word 9 Setpoint W9 to CU i inerti KR0308 KR l 2 7 to CU 9b 8 Variable moment of inertia gt gt a H505 0 Word 10 Setpoint W10 to CU Control word 2 8 to CU constant output 0 0 KR0000 gt KR Enable for speed controller H506 0 constant output 0 0 KR0000 KR Control word 2 10 to CU P kro000 gt H516 2000 H517 2000 ii H518 2000 B H519 2508 H520 2000 Control word 2 11 to CU Control word 2 12 to CU H531 2000 Control word 2 13 to CU H532 2000 Control word 2 14 to CU U Control wo
85. word 2 15 from CB J Fig 4 18 Block diagram to implement the cut tension function Caution Observe the sequence in which the freely assignable blocks are executed Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 91 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Parameters 5 Parameters 5 1 Parameter handling Parameter designation Parameterization 92 All of the parameters which are implemented on the technology module are called technology parameters In the software configured with CFC these parameters are always designated with TP_xxx xxx stands for the parameter number Quantities which can be changed are displayed as Hxxx and others which cannot be changed display quantities as dxxx at the drive converter operator panel and SIMOVIS The technology parameters can be read and changed from several locations device operator panel PMU or OP1 SST1 serial interface RS232 or SST2 RS485 from the base drive CBP CB1 interface module if available SIMADYN D monitor which can be addressed with CFC IBS start up or SIMOVIS program via the serial interface X01 of the technology module The parameterization of the axial winder is realized as standard using SIMOVIS or via the drive operator panel PMU or OP1 S The parameter changes are automatically saved in the EEPROM in a non volatile fashion Refer to Chapter 7 1 for the various parameterization resources Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 0
86. 0 0 15000 m min R 19200 9600 187500 Baud DI 10000 ms 9920 ms oO KR0229 R 4096 DI 121 Parameters H252 b d 13 H253 b d 7 H254 b d 9a H255 b d 9a H256 b d 6 H257 b d 6 H258 b d 6 H259 b d 6 122 Rated pulses web tachometer For incremental encoders with two encoder tracks offset through 90 degrees N H252 4 H 213 circumference of the measuring wheel mm gt Position actual value KR0229 in mm gt L 1 0 for setting H239 and H240 N H252 1 gt Position actual value KR0229 in pulses gt Setting H239 and H240 refer to Chapter 3 5 2 and Chapter 5 H239 H240 IF_CU D901 RP Input web break inputs Input for the web break pulse must be connected with the application specific source Default B2253 internal web break signal TENSZ_07 T2100 1 Smoothing time for Av Smoothing time constant for speed correction Av which for a speed correction control H203 3 corresponds to the tension control output DIAMZ_01 D940 T Adaptation factor Av This adaptation factor allows a higher accuracy for the diameter calculation when using dancer rolls as the speed correction Av from the closed loop position control is taken into account into the diameter computer for dancer roll 0 0 1 0 for others 0 0 DIAMZ_01 D945 Xx2 Braking characteristic speed point 1 Speed below which the reduced braking torque acts Scaling factor 10 0
87. 0 0 FREI_BST UMS_2 X2 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type KR0000 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 KR0 000 R KR0 000 R B2000 KHO 000 R KR0 000 R 143 Parameters H825 b d 23a H826 b d 23a H827 b d 23a H828 b d 23a H840 b d 23a H841 b d 23a H845 b d 23a H846 b d 23a H850 b d 23b 144 Switch signal UMS_2 The input switch signal for numerical changeover switch 2 can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant B_output Y 0 FREI BST UMS_ 2 1 Input 1 UMS_3 Input 1 for numerical changeover switch 3 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI BST UMS_3 X1 Input 2 UMS_ 3 Input 2 for numerical changeover switch 3 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI BST UMS_3 X2 Switch signal UMS_3 The input switch signal for numerical changeover switch 3 can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant B_output Y 0 FREI BST UMS_3 1 Input 1 ADD_1 Input 1 for adder 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output
88. 1 minimum evaluation activated TENSZ_01 T1515 1 Smoothing tension setpoint Smoothing time constant for the total setpoint after the additional setpoint is added TENSZ_01 71525 T Minimum value speed dependent tension controller limits Lower limit value for a speed dependent input of the output limiting of the tension controller TENSZ_01 T1710 X2 Select tension controller limits Setting for the operating mode for the tension controller output limiting 1 the tension controller output is limited to 0 H195 2 the tension controller output is imited to H195 3 limiting to 0 H195 absolute speed actual value 4 limiting to H195 absolute speed actual value TENSZ_01 T1715 X Adaptation tension controller limits The maximum influence of the tension controller is defined using H195 it acts as multiplying factor for the limits selected using H194 TENSZ_01 T1745 X Inhibit component tension controller For closed loop dancer roll position controls the tension controller must be used as a pure P controller the changeover is realized using H196 0 PI controller T se P controller Caution The tension controller must be inhibited when changing over this parameter TENSZ_01 T1790 HI Minimum Kp tension controller Gain at the start of adaptation to the variable moment of inertia generally for Jv 0 0 TENSZ_01 T1770 B1 Maximum Kp tension controller Gain at the end of adaptation normally at Jv 1 0
89. 1 Enable free function blocks all of the free blocks are shown in block diagram 23a b This is sub divided into two cycle times T1 2ms and T5 128ms All of the parameter and binector connector numbers are listed in Chapter 5 and summarized in Table 10 2 and Table 10 3 when parameterizing please observe the run sequence e g T1 3 in block diagram 23a b of the free blocks Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 163 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Diagnostic LEDs alarms faults 8 Diagnostic LEDs alarms faults 8 1 Diagnostic LEDs on the T400 LED on the T400 The T400 has 3 LEDs red yellow and green Red LED The red LED flashes if the T400 software is being processed This LED must always flash even if the T400 has not logged on with the CU in the drive T400 status Flash type Flash frequency Hz Fault error Medium 2 5 User stop Communications error Computation time overflow Hardware monitoring error Table 8 1 Diagnostics using the red LED Yellow LED The yellow LED flashes if the T400 communicates with the base drive CU Error if only the red LED flashes but not the yellow LED In the CU flashes Corresponds to the sampling data transfer to the base drive O K time controlled using function block DRIVE In the SRT400 always off At the left slot controlled using function block DRIVE In the SRT400 flashes Corresponds to the sampling At the right slot data transfer to T400 at
90. 1000 X Integrating time density correction The time where the correction factor for the material density changes by 1 0 if the tension controller output and acceleration actual value are 1 0 This should be a minimum of 10x greater than the tension controller integral action time DIAMZ_07 DC70 TI Value Type Value Unit Type Value Unit Type Value Type Value Unit Type Value Unit Type Value Type Value Min Max Type 20000 ms 500 ms ms 20 ms 0 0 0 0 0 70 Value 200000 Unit Type ms R Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H169 b d 17 H170 b d 17 H172 b d 7 H173 b d 8 H174 b d 8 H175 b d 7 H176 b d 7 H177 b d 8 H178 b d 7 Knife in the cutting position The input for the knife in cutting position command must be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output 0 1Q1Z_01 B52 1 Partner drive is in tension control Input for the Partner drive is in tension control command must be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output 0 1Q1Z_01 B53 1 Smoothing tension actual value Time constant for the actual value smoothing TENSZ_01 T641 T Differentiating time constant Sets the D component of the tension controller if H174 0 refer to Chapter 3 4 3 2
91. 16 H045 b d 16 H046 b d 17 H047 b d 17 H048 b d 17 H049 b d 17 100 Input winder Value The input for the winder command 1 must be connected with the application Type specific source Default B2000 constant digital output 0 1Q1Z_07 B150 1 Input saturation setpoint polarity Value The input to changeover the polarity of the saturation setpoint must be connected Type with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output 0 1Q1Z_07 B170 Input Off1 On Value The input for the power on command for system operation must be connected with Type the application specific source Default B2600 control word 1 0 from CB Alternatively e B2640 for peer to peer control word 1 0 from PTP 1Q1Z_07 B180 1 Input inhibit ramp function generator Value The input for the inhibit ramp function generator command must be connected with Type the application specific source Default B2604 control word 1 4 from CB Alternatively e B2644 for peer to peer control word 1 4 from PTP 1Q1Z_07 B201 1 Input Off2 Value The input for the Off2 command must be connected with the application specific Type source This command is also effective from every other source it is low active Default B2001 constant digital output 1Q1Z_07 B190 1 Input Off3 Value The input for the Off fast stop command must be connected with the application Type specific sour
92. 2 11 bit VZ D A 2 analog outputs H0V 10mA D 11 bits sign A P24 external 45 24 50 51 l K 2 binary o utputs s 52 Xo Lang E 76 77 mH nnn E 78 79 Absolute value encoder 1 me o y Absolute value encoder 2 J72 or 73 1 Serial el cee 74 interface 2 L for peer to peer USS MASTER DRIVES Dual or DC MASTER port basic drive RAM CUx Fig 19 T400 technology module 2 2 1 Digital inputs and outputs Power supply The digital inputs and outputs of the T400 technology module require or voltage supply 24 volt signals In this case the 24 V supply voltage for the digital outputs must be externally supplied Digital control The SPW 420 closed loop control core uses all of the 8 digital inputs on inputs the T400 Table 2 9 When required the default values pre assigned values can be changed Bit inversion When required it is possible to invert each bit of the digital inputs by H295 using the appropriate parameterization To realize this the appropriate bit of parameter H295 must be set to 1 refer to Chapter 5 B2003 System start H021 1 operation enable for system operation B2004 Tension control on H022 1 on switch in the closed loop tension control B2005 Inhib tension contr H023 1 inhibit tension controller output 0 cue Ye as lero a anaes lis ae eae lso p20t0 Local stop Hoz8 si 1 stop for local operation Table 2 9 Terminal assignment digital inputs T400 module 16ms cycle t
93. 2 Software release gt 1 2 e CUS Software release gt 1 1 e CUVC Software release gt 3 0 e CUMC Software release gt 1 1 e CUD1 Software release gt 1 3 Interface modules e CBP Software release gt 1 0 e CB1 Software release 1 3 Configuring tool if the software is not only to be just parameterized e STEP7 CFC D7 SYS Software release gt 4 0 1 3 2 Main features of the closed loop winder control Function various winding techniques e g direct closed loop tension control indirect closed loop tension control or closed loop constant v control are possible override speed controller the tension controller acts directly on the motor torque or the speed correction technique the tension controller acts on the speed setpoint switchable tension controller and speed controller gain adaptation as a function of the diameter winding hardness control using a polygon characteristic with 5 points diameter dependent can be parameterized Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 11 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Overview Communications Monitoring Operating mode Measured value sensing 12 speed dependent friction compensation using a polygon characteristic with 6 points can be parameterized acceleration pre control as a function of the diameter as well as the web width gearbox stage and material thickness The thickness can be automatically learned tension pre
94. 2 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO311 tension actual value smoothed 1Q2Z_01 G200 X Input comparison value GWM 2 The selection of the comparison value for limit value monitor 2 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO304 sum tension position reference value 1Q2Z_01 G270 X Adaptation input value GWM 2 Adapts the input signal for limit value monitor 2 1 no adaptation 2 absolute value generation 3 sign reversal 1Q2Z_01 G240 XCS Smoothing input value GWM 2 Smoothes the input signal for limit value monitor 2 1Q2Z_01 G260 T Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Parameters Value 500 Min 0 Unit ms Type R Value 1 Min 1 Max 3 Type l Value 0 0 Min 0 0 Max 1 0 Type R Value 0 0 Min 0 Max 1 0 Type R Value B2403 Type B Value KR0311 Type R Value KR0304 Type R Value 1 Min Max 3 Type l Value 500 Min 0 Unit ms Type R 107 Parameters H119 b d 10 H120 b d 10 H121 b d 10 H122 b d 10 H125 b d 20 H126 b d 20 H127 b d 11 H128 b d 11 108 Adaptation comparison value GWM 2 Value Adapts the comparison value for limit value monitor 2 Min 1 no adapt ation Max 2 absolute value generation 3 sign reversal Type 1Q2Z_01 G300 XCS Interval limit GWM 2 Value Enters the interval limits for the limit value monitor 2
95. 2 control words The setpoints which are transferred can be freely connected within the software using BICO technology so that they do not have a fixed assignment refer to Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 15 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 T400 technology module block diagrams 2 15 and 22a The telegram structure for PROFIBUS DP is shown in Table 2 3 with PPO type 5 CS ol H Jas rovom Is e GT O ass rovod Table 2 3 Receive channels from PROFIBUS 2 ms sampling time Send data The send data actual value status word selection can also be parameterized T400 gt COMBD Actual value W6 free H443 0 r t b d 15 Eo a Actual value W7 free H446 0 r t b d 15 Actual value W8 free H447 0 r t b d 15 Actual value W9 free H448 0 r t b d 15 Actual value W10 free H449 0 r t b d 15 Table 2 4 Send channels sampling time 2 ms Monitoring the The telegram data transfer can be monitored during communications telegram receive The time limits after power on and during operation can be set separately H495 496 The fault and alarm messages are transferred to the CU where they are displayed if a data suppression mask H011 H012 has not been activated refer to Chapter 8 2 2 1 3 Interface to the peer to peer b d 14 Communications via peer to peer 16 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 T400 technology module The serial interface X02 is assigned to the peer
96. 246 247 Assignment messages operator panel display Overspeed positive A097 F116 Overspeed negative A098 F117 Overtorque positive A099 F118 Overtorque negative A100 F119 Drive blocked stalled A101 F120 Receive from CU faulted A102 F121 Receive from CB faulted A103 F122 Receive from PTP faulted A104 F123 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet 20 Loading position Swiveling mechanism lt Splicing knife Glue roll Tension measurement Tachometer Tension threshold 10 4 Partner drive is in closed loop tension control 17 5 Operating enable 18 8 3 B2508 H149 Z0 6 2 Knife in the cutting pos 17 5 3s Tension controller on 17 8 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 Splice control open loop Change position Swiveling mechanism ae Tachometer JL 10000 ms H148 _ Time for reverse winding after the splice Splicing knife Tension measurement Splice enable 17 6 Reverse winding 6 4 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet 21 18 7 Main contactor on 17 4 No Off 2 17 4 No Off 3 J B2508 18 8 Enable inverter 1 ___ Enable ramp fct gen 1 _ Start ramp fct gen Ramp fct gen setpoint enable Control word 1 7 52007 1 D T from CB 22a 4 B2607 cen ae Inching 2 Control from AG Control word 1 to CU rrr rrr yr OGM ka Fault T400 20 8 Fault external 1 Ready to power up Rea
97. 3 at CU Control word 2 3 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 14 Control word 2 4 at CU Control word 2 4 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 15 Control word 2 5 at CU Control word 2 5 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 I6 Control word 2 6 at CU Control word 2 6 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 17 Control word 2 7 at CU Control word 2 7 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 18 Control word 2 8 at CU Control word 2 8 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 19 Enable for speed controller in CU Enable command for the speed controller in the CU setting for control word 2 9 at CU Default B2508 operating enable IF_CU Steuerwort_2 110 Control word 2 10 at CU Control word 2 10 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 111 Digital output 1 terminal 46 web break The output can be connected with the application specific source
98. 4 18 6 H051 2613 B2613 B Control word 1 13 from CB 22a 4 B2653_ Control word 1 13 from PTP 22a 5 Input Off 2 generator inhibit 5 1 Constant digital output 1 H047 2001 Ramp function generator stop 5 1 H049 2605 B2605 B Control word 1 5 from CB 22a 4 B2645 _ Control word 1 5 from PTP 22a 5 H050 2606 B2606 B Control word 1 6 from CB 22a 4 B2646 __ Control word 1 6 from PTP 22a 5 Setpoint enable 5 1 H052 2626 Local run B2626 B 18 1 Control word 2 6 from CB 22a 7 Digital input 2 term 54 13a 3 13a 3 Digital input 2 term 54 J B2004 System Start 18 6 H021 2003 B2003 B Digital input 1 term 53 13a 3 H022 2004 B2004 B 1 eor 7 Tension controller on 5 1 7 1 7 7 8 1 21 1 22a 4 Control word 1 11 from CB B2611 gt 1 B212 H169 2000 B2000 B 21 8 Splice enable Knife in cutting position 21 1 Inhibit tension controller 8 1 H023 2005 B2005 B Digital input 3 term 55 13a 3 Set diameter 9a 1 H024 2006 B2006 B Digital input 4 term 56 13a 3 Enter H025 2007 B2007 7 B 5 1 suppl setpoint Digital input 5 term 57 13a 3 B2001 E B Constant digital output 0 22a 3 Control word 1 1
99. 4 KR0066 gt Setpoint W4 PTP 2 5 Term 73 Word 5 KR0067 gt Setpoint W5 PTP 2 5 Settings for the peer to peer protocol 0 Enable peer to peer communications 19200 Baud rate 9 92s Setting value d248 Status display Note Changes to H245 H289 only become effective after power down up Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Peer to peer Interface Sheet 14 Serial interface 1 for USS Slave Protocol Terminal 70 71 USS Slave Fixed settings Receiver Transmiter Baud rate Term 71 Rx Station address 0 Monitoring time 384000ms Number of process words 2 PKW processing 1 Settings for USS_Slave Protocol 1 Enable USS_Slave communication 0 USS data transfer line 1 8 on T400 OFF SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet 14a Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 USS Slave Interface PROFIBUS enable 0 Command to CB re config 1 only for SRT400 CB station address only for SRT400 PPO type PROFIBUS Monitoringtime 20000ms Setting valuet 19920ms Status display Receive data Word 1 B2615 7 Control word 1 from CB 12 3 22a 3 Word 2 KRO0450 Setpoint W2 from CB 2 3 Word 3 KR0451 Setpoint W3 from CB 2 3 Word 4 B2635 7 Control word 2 from CB 2 3 22a 7 Word 5 Setpoint W5 from CB 2 3 Word 6 Setpoint W6 from CB 2 3 24 1
100. 50 Code 165 refer to Section 7 1 2 H160 initializ 0 gt 1 Sf Tension control on Current limiting control Drive number H997 Velocity setpoint SIMADYN D Identification 80 1d988 Speed setpoint Velocity Override _ limiting Positioning ramp function generator Web velocity Variable moment of inertia Speed actual value as Kp adaptation input Compensation 0 0 inertia Tension controller output Supplementary torque setpoint Tension control on Compensation Speed friction correction control l Toru limits Tension controller output Tension control on Current limiting control Standard SPW420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Overview structures for closed loop speed and tension position control Sheet 4 Setpoint A 13 3 Accept setpoint A 16 4 Normalization web velocit 0 0 7 Setpoint B Effective web velocity setpoint KR0301 gt Accept eE setpoint B 16 6 Upper limit 1 10 OE f Velocity Enable setpoint 17 4 Lower limit 1 10 H132 i ties 6 Ramp up time 30000 ms Slave drive 1 1 0 2 Active gearbox Ramp down time 30000 ms aoe Sean ratio 6 1 9a 1 9b 1 System operation 18 4 Ramp fct gen stop 17 4 Set velocity setpoint to stop 16 4 Initial rounding off gearbox stage 2 16 8 Inhibit ramp fct generator 17 2 8ms H155 Smoothing KR0340 Compensation web velocity 8 1 9b 1 C
101. 55 b d 15a H560 b d 25 d561 b d 25 H562 b d 25 d563 b d 25 H564 b d 25 d565 b d 25 H566 b d 25 Actual value W6 torque actual value Receive word 6 from the CU is connected to the fixed connector torque actual value in the CU IF_CU Istwert_W6 Y Actual value W7 Receive word 7 from the CU can be connected with the application specific destination IF_CU Istwert_W7 Y Actual value W8 Receive word 8 from the CU can be connected with the application specific destination IF_CU Istwert_W8 Y Input Anz_R1 Input for the free KR connector display 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant R_output 1Q2Z_01 Anz_R1 X Output Anz_R1 Display parameter from H560 1Q2Z_01 Anz_R1 Y Input Anz_R2 Input for the free KR connector display 2 can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant R_output 1Q2Z_01 Anz_R2 X Output Anz_R2 Display parameter from H562 1Q2Z_01 Anz_R2 Y Input Anz_R3 Input for the free KR connector display 3 can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant R_output 1Q2Z_01 Anz_R3 X Output Anz_R3 Display parameter from H564 1Q2Z_01 Anz_R3 Y Input Anz_R4 Input for the free KR connector display 4 can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant R_output 1Q2Z_01 Anz_R4 X Axial winder SPW420 SIMAD
102. 58 7 2 4 2 Setting for CUVC or CUMO sees eee seat eeeeaaeeeetaaaeeeseaaeees 158 7 2 5 Setting the tension or dancer roll controller block diagram 7 8 sees 158 7 2 6 Setting the tension controller Kp a daptation sese eee eee e 160 7 2 7 Setting the saturation setpoint H145 ooo eee cesses eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 161 7 2 8 Setting the braking characteristic H256 259 eee ceeeeeaeeesetaeeeees 161 7 2 Operation with the communications module CBP CB1 sese eee ee ee 162 7 4 Operation with peer to peer sees ee eee ceeeeeceeeeeeecneeeetecieeeetee ceeetecieeeeteeieeeetee 162 7 5 Operation with USS Slave see eee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteee ceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenes 163 7 6 Operation with free function blocks sse ee ee eee ceeeeeeeaeeteaeeseeeeesnaeene ceeeeeesaaes 163 8 Diagnostic LEDs alarms faults c ssseeeeeeeeeeee sese 164 8 1 Diagnostic LEDs on the T400 ooo eee ia a epii R Oar R 164 8 2 Alarms and faults of the axial winder sese esse K ceeeeeeaes 165 G 0 511111 THH 166 10 AD PONG T 167 TOV Version CHANGES TTT 167 10 2 Definition of the 5 cycle times sees eee yeee eee Kee eee ceaaeeeenenaeeeeneaas 167 10 3 List of block I O connectors and parameters sees eee ceeeeteeeeeeeaeeeettaaeees 168 10 3 1 List of parameters and connections which can be changed sese eee 168 10 3 2 List of block I O connectors and bineCtors sese sese eee ceeteeeeteeteeeeteeaes 176 104 ST sal eee la 182 TOS GEG CN Ta TTT 183 Axial winde
103. 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples 60 11 12 13 14 15 16 Imax 17 Accelerating torque referred to the motor shaft Nm for the accelerating time tp L 4 Jy Length material which can be wound round materials m A CI p 2000 V 3 DR Relative amount of material which can wound as a function of the winding ratio Winding time s Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Formula characters and dimensions used Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples material width mm maximum material width of the roll mm material thickness mm actual diameter mm core or winder core diameter mm maximum diameter mm material diameter for round materials mm gearbox ratio refer to equations moment of inertia kgm fixed moment of inertia as a result of the winder components motor gearbox winder core referred to the motor shaft kgm 7 material length m maximum material length m for a core diameter mm moment of inertia of the gearbox referred to the motor shaft kgm moment of inertia of the winder core kgm 7 motor moment of inertia kgm variable moment of inertia as a result of the wound material referred to the motor shaft kgm refer to equation 10 weight kg winding
104. 7 8 Operating modes 5 7 Input Alternative on command H129 2000 Constant digital output 0 B2000 B Local crawl K mago Alternative on command Local run Before a new operating mode can be pea tea the previous one must be exited Ss Main contactor ON Control word 1 0 to CU R 22 6 GURE signal controller enable base drive SW1 2 J B2504 15a 3 Pezz H amp Standstill 6 8 Checkback signal D base drive ready amp Local positioning R gt Stanstill tension on 17 2 D B2503 Local inching Tension control forwards on 8 2 gt 1 Inching time 10000ms _H014 H S Local inching ae backwards R System operation 5 1 No operating gt I Fault B0508 base unit amp Operating enable 5 3 6a 2 8 1 13 6 15a 2 21 4 22 2 Fault base unit No off 2 17 3 No off 3 gt 1 17 3 t t System start 17 8 Local oper control 17 8 gt 1 Operating mode O if LOCAL operator control and no other mode has been selected SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet 18 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 Power on control open loop Mot pot 1 operating mode 1 RFG Save pulse 1Bit 0 00001 1Bit 0 00001 16 2 Mot pot 1 raise 16 2 Mot pot 1 lower Save pulse 1 Bit 0 00001 1 Bit 0 00001 16 2 Mot pot 2 higher 16 2 Mot pot 2 lower Standar
105. 7 99 Parameters 5 2 Value range The parameters can only be changed within a specific value range The value range normally depends on the data type of the parameter and in range MIN MAX limits If no information is provided in the value range column in the parameter lists then the value range is specified by its Parameter list All of the parameters used in the standard SPW420 axial winder package are listed on the following pages The list is realized in the general form Description Data Parameter name Value Max Unit b d n CFC chart block connection dxxx Explanation and if required information on the parameter Min Max b d n CFC chart block connection Type Table 1 aN Parameter number xxx which can be changed axxx Parameter number xxx which can be displayed value Factory setting of the parameter or connection default Min max Value range for the setting Type Data type refer to Table 5 2 Data type Value range Resolution Boolean quantit Logical 0 or 1 32768 0 32767 1 Double Integer 1 loaing pint number rea 17E38 0 17698 IT Status word Eae ED Table 2 Axial winder SPW 420 Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Parameters Parameter H000 b d 4 d001 b d 4 d002 b d 4 H003 b d 20 H004 b d 20 H005 b d 20 H007 b d 20 H008 b d 20 94 Description Language selection Selecting the text on the HMI display 1 English Caution It is necessary to i
106. 81 32 MHz frequency 12 of which 4 bidirectional inputs or outputs 24 V Digital outputs 6 of which 4 bidirectional inputs or outputs 24V 50 mA Analog inputs 5 12 bit resolution 10 V 2 differential inputs Analog outputs 2 12 bit resolution 10V 10mA Serial interfaces 2 1 RS232 or RS485 2 wire 1 RS485 2 or 4 wire Pulse encoder inputs 2 1 track A B zero HTL 15V or TTL RS422 5V 1 track A B zero and coarse HTL pulse Table 1 1 Overview of the T400 technology module Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 9 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Overview The following components are required to operate the SPW420 axial Prerequisite winder Product description Software package SPW 420 axial winder with T400 6DD1842 0AA0 Operating Instructions T400 German 6DD1902 0EBO Manual axial winder SPW 420 German 6DD1903 0AA0 English 6DD1903 0ABO French 6DD1903 0ACO Table 1 2 SPW420 components required Adaptation The source code of the standard SPW420 axial winder software package possibility is available on CD ROM Using the graphic configuring platform of SIMADYN D i e CFC when required the functionality of the closed loop winder control can be adapted to specific customer requirements The individual components in Table 1 3 are also available Product description Axial winder software CD ROM including User 6DD1843 0AA0 Manual T400 technology module 6DD1606 0ADO D7 ES V5 0 6DD1801 4DA2 complete softwa
107. CU Sollwert_W7 X Setpoint W8 at CU Send word 8 at CU is connected to the fixed connector KR0308 variable moment of inertia IF_CU Sollwert_W8 X Setpoint W9 at CU Send word 9 at CU can be freely connected Default KR0000 constant output Y 0 0 IF_CU Sollwert_W9 X Setpoint W10 at CU Send word 10 at CU can be freely connected Default KR0000 constant output Y 0 0 IF_CU Sollwert_W 10 X Control word 2 0 at CU Control word 2 0 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 I1 Control word 2 1 at CU Control word 2 1 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 12 Control word 2 2 at CU Control word 2 2 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 I3 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value KR0303 Type R Value KR0558 Type R Value KR0556 Type R Value KR0557 Type R Value KR0308 Type R Value KR0000 Type R Value KROO 00 Type R Value B2000 Type B Value B2000 Type B Value B2000 Type B 135 Parameters H513 b d 15a H514 b d 15a H515 b d 15a H516 b d 15a H517 b d 15a H518 b d 15a H519 b d 15a H520 b d 15a H521 b d 13a 136 Control word 2
108. CUVC in case of the limited voltage 10V at analog inputs of base drive an ATI board is required e When an analog tachometer is used in CUVC P130 13 14 the related parameters must be set according to the Instruction Manual e Check if Vact measured value from a handheld tachometer V If the gearbox ratio is not precisely known the parameter H214 Pxxx should be so calibrated until Vat equals v at D Dgore The correspondence should be checked at various web velocity setpoints up to 1 0 If parameters H212 H214 and H217 on the T400 are changed they only become effective after the electronics power supply of the converter has been switched off and on again refer to Chapter 3 2 1 H022 Source tension controller on Refer to Chapter 5 H088 Diameter setting value Fixed value diameter setting value Note H089 Source diameter setting val Refer to Chapter 5 d310 Actual diameter Display parameter Table 3 10 Parameters to celebrate the speed actual value 3 3 Control 3 3 1 Control signals block diagrams 16 17 22b Control bits The source for the control commands required for the particular application can be freely selected The individual commands can be entered from the COMBOARD the base drive via a peer to peer 34 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Parameterization Monitoring Function description coupling or via the digital inputs of the T400 The indiv
109. Control word 2 9 from CB B2630 Control word 2 10 from CB EE Control word 2 11 from CB B2632 7 Controlword 2 12 from CB 1 B2633 Control word 2 13 from CB B2634 Control word 2 14 from CB B2635__ Control word 2 15 from CB Main contactoron B2640 1 Control word 1 0 from Peer to Peer No Off 2 B2641 Control word 1 1 from Peer to Peer No Off 3 B2642 Control word 1 2 from Peer to Peer Inverter enable B2643__ Control word 1 3 from Peer to Peer Ramp function generator inhibit 5 B2644 Control word 1 4 from Peer to Peer T B2645 Ramp function generator stop Control word 1 5 from Peer to Peer Ramp function generator setpoint enable B2646 Control word 1 6 from Peer to Peer Control word 1 Acknowledge fault B2647 pose Control word 1 7 from Peer to Peer from peer to peer __ Local inching forwards B2648 Control word 1 8 from Peer to Peer lt 2 gt Local inching backwards B2649 Control word 1 9 from Peer to Peer Control from PLC _ _ B2650 Control word 2 0 from Peer to Peer Tension controller on _ _ _ B54 Control word 2 1 from Peer to Peer Tension controller inhibit B2652 Control word 2 2 from Peer to Peer Standstill tension on _________ B2653 Control word 2 3 from Peer to Peer R Set diameter B2654 ___ Control word 2 4 from Peer to Peer Fold diameter B2655 Control word 2 5 from Peer to Peer Oo 9 oW EMM
110. D B2508 H093 401 Velocity actual value KR0349 tachometer 9a 1 Fixed value 0 0 KR0401 gt KB kR0s49 gt Pen Stop Adapt divisor 1 0 Adapt factor 1 0 Lazo Setpoint A 5 1 H096 95 Fixed value 0 0 KR0095 gt gt KR Length stop 10 4 Velocity setpoint 5 8 Ramp down time 60 s Bremsweg KRO350 Rounding off time gis H242 rechner Actual braking distance Max geschwindigkeit 1000 m min H244 Pressure actual value from dancer 8 4 Analog input 5 H097 324 Term 96 99 10 4 LKR0324 KR Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Inputs for setpoints speed actual value sensing length computer Sheet 13 Digital inputs on the T400 Hardware address Invert mask 1600 _H295 Selection B2527 H521 0 H537 Selection B2528 H522 0 H538_ Selection B2529 H523 0 H539 Selection B2530 H524 0 4540 Additional digital inputs Digital input1 term 53 17 7 Digital input 2 term 54 17 7 Digital input 3 term 55 17 7 Digital input 4 term 56 17 7 Digital input 5 term 57 17 7 Digital input 6 term 58 17 7 Digital input 7 term 59 17 7 Digital input 8 term 60 17 7 Digital input 9 term 46 Digital input 10 term 47 Digital input 11 term 48 Digital input 12 term 49 Digital input 13 term 84 Digital input 14 term 65 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software ve
111. EER PtP_Zentr BDR Upper limit PtP monitoring Maximum tolerance time before starting telegram receive monitoring IF_PEER Ueberwa LU Setting value PtP monitoring H247 H246 max time tolerance for telegram failure default 80ms IF_PEER Ueberwa SV Status display PTP receive Status display of receive block CRV as indication for the fault message F123 or A104 IF_PEER Empf_PEER YTS Input length actual value The input for the length actual value must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0229 web actual value from the web tachometer pulse encoder 2 DIAMZ_07 W5 X1 EEPROM key In order to establish the initialization status of all of the parameters with a rising edge key parameter H250 must be set 165 at H160 Observe the information instructions in 7 1 2 CONTZ_01 URLAD KEY Rated pulses shaft tachometer For incremental encoders with two encoder tracks offset through 90 degrees N H251 4 H 212 gt Position actual value 1 0 revolution H251 1 gt Position actual value 4 H212 pulses rev IF_CU D900 RP Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Parameters Value Unit Type Value Unit Type Value Min Max Unit Type Value Min Max Unit Type Value Min Unit Type Value Min Unit Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type 1000 ms 100
112. EER x gt 3102 Speed control on CUVC CUMC P561 x 3103 Control word 1 22 5 Open loop control monitoring Status word 1 15a 6 12 6 Speed setpoint 6 8 P7s4 02 148 receive word 2 13 4 0 not used ieee acl o Pence Receive word 3 free Control word 2 15a 2 Status word 2 free 6 8 P734 05 165 Torque setpoint 6a 1 P493 Positive torque limit 6 8 223009 v pe Yna value Negative t limit 6 8 P499 3007 ae P232 3008 P235 LA P734 08 0 ee E es e Receive word 8 free Setpoint W9toCU 15a 7 P22 9008 KP adaption Setpoint W10toCU nsa 71 LESS lt 3010 Suppl torque setpoint Technology parameter on T400 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Overview Data transfer at an example T400 lt gt CUVC Sheet 3 Closed loop tension position control Compensation web velocity Tension controller Tension position reference value Actual diameter Winding hardness control Tension controller output Supplementary setpoint Tension position actual value Kp adaption Diameter Rising edge tension control on Select tension control technique Closed loop speed control Language selection 0 H000 Identification standard software package 420 d001 Software release standard software package 2 0 002 Saturation 0 0 CPU utilization T1 to T5 H352 0356 Supplementary setpoint Erase EEPROM H2
113. Frequently especially for high gearbox ratios the friction torque is strongly dependent on the gearbox temperature This can mean that friction compensation is either difficult or is just not practical 154 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Commissioning the winder For some gearbox designs high mandrel speeds cause the gearbox temperature to increase to some extent This temperature rise results in a significantly different friction torque We recommend that the measuring time when plotting the friction characteristic is kept as short as possible later when winding high shaft speeds only occur briefly Under certain circumstances after the first commissioning it may be necessary to post optimize the friction characteristic from experience winders are run in after between 2 and 30 operating hours When using gearbox stage 2 the friction characteristic output based on gearbox stage 1 should be adapted using H229 or H128 Applications A friction compensation should be set especially for indirect tension control techniques The winder is operated without any material when plotting the friction characteristic When using the direct tension control with a tension transducer or dancer roll frequently it is not necessary to parameterize the friction characteristic However it makes it easier to set the inertia compensation and tension pre control Caution If the friction compensation
114. H239 1 0 if H240 lt 0 5 where L the rated length for actual length 1 0 refer to Chapter 3 5 2 DIAMZ_07 W20 X2 Ramp down time for braking distance computer Scaling factor 600 s i e the value used in the processor H241 600 DIAMZ_07 W30 X1 Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Unit Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Unit Type 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 60 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H242 b d 13 H243 b d 9b H244 b d 13 H245 b d 14 H246 b d 14 H247 b d 14 d248 b d 14 H249 b d 13 H250 b d 4 H251 b d 13 Ramp down rounding off time for the braking distance computer Scaling factor 600 s i e the value used in the processor H242 600 DIAMZ_07 W40 X1 Smoothing web width Smoothing time constant when the web width changes DIAMZ_01 P150 T Rated velocity for the braking distance computer Scaling factor 7500 m min i e the value used in the processor H244 7500 DIAMZ_07 W70 X1 Baud rate PtP protocol Sets the baud rate for the peer to peer protocol 9600 19200 38400 93750 187500 baud Initialization is required after the change has been made IF_P
115. I330 Y Type Tension setpoint after the winding hardness characteristic Min Max TENSZ_01 T1470 Y Type Torque setpoint Min Receive torque setpoint from CU or computed on T400 Max Type SREFZ_07 NT119 Y Torque actual value Min Max 1Q1Z_01 Al21A Y Type Smoothed torque setpoint Min Max SREFZ_07 NT130 Y Type Control word 1 Type Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit OO NLO OT RO NEO On OFF2 voltage free OFF3 fast stop System start Ramp function generator inhibit Ramp function generator stop Enable setpoint Acknowledge fault Inching forwards Inching backwards Control from CS Tension controller on Inhibit tension controller Standstill tension on Set diameter Hold diameter 1Q1Z_07 B210 QS 1 active 0 active 0 active 1 active 1 active 1 active 1 active 1 active 1 active 1 active 1 active 1 active 1 active 1 active 1 active 1 active Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 d333 b d 22b d334 b d 22b d335 b d 22 Control word 2 Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 NW GWU EMM Input supplementary setpoint 1 active Local positioning 1 active Motorized potentiometer 2 raise 1 active Motorized potentiometer 2 lower 1 active Local operator control 1 active Local stop 1 active Loc
116. ImpV FREI_BST ImpV I B2000 H865 Pulse duration ImpV FREI BST ImpV T Oms H866 Input ImpB FREI_BST ImpB I B2000 H867 Pulse duration ImpB FREI_BST ImpB T Oms H868 FREI_BST Invt B2000 H870 Input 1 AND _1 FREI_BST AND_1 l1 B2001 H871 Input 2 AND_1 FREI_BST AND _1 12 B2001 H876 Input 1 OR_1 FREIBST OR_1 I1 B2000 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 175 Appendix H877 Input 2 OR_1 FREI BST OR_ 1 12 B2000 H880 FREI_BST Vergl X1 KR0000 Smoothing time smooth Oms Drive number PARAVZO1 DRNRX Jo Table 10 2 List of parameters and connections which can be changed H881 FREI_BST Vergl X2 KR0000 B Ro he H883 input smooth SC FREILBST Giaetx kRoooo R oms fR R C EE 10 3 2 List of block I O connectors and binectors Connect Display Significance Chart block Pre assignment or No para connection value KR o l Connector real type Hox if available de Connector Boolean type Hxxx if available kox x l Connector or W type Hox if available Connect Displ Significance Chart block Pre assignment or No para connection kRoo00 Constant output real type Y 0_ 0 a01 1 standard software package a002 _ Software version axial winder KRoo1e ao18 Setpointw2 PiP IF PEERSolwetw2Y pons a019 sana PiP F ERER Raen wasy spons does _ Setpointwa PiP IF ERER Raen way pons lans Setpointws PiP CIF ERER Raen wsy
117. N lt 9 gt 8 stl Lim iting lt 15 gt amp H194 1 8 H 195 0 1 s l l s l s l a l a l s l s l a l k 9 I lt 14 gt Variable moment p x of inertia l Torque actual value s l a l s l s l a l a l x l s l s 91 lt 3 gt T400 Speed setpoint Breite P443 3002 ist icine rare Peeran Madea OTT DOT EW hH sations Speed act value 9 2 D P734 06 24 K p adaption E I Positive torque 6 x limit P493 3006 191 StL One L F Speed F Vag controller P232 3008 7 Negative torque A limit P499 3007 1 0 E Winder from above or mm sm s O c lt O a lt 3 a o E gt 9 D Fig 4 16 Unwinder with tension transducer closed loop torque limiting control 3 Page 3 in the block diagram lt 2 gt Information in the text 88 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples 4 13 Configuring example Winder with closed loop constant v control Applications Note lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt If there is no nip position between an unwinder and a winder which then keeps the web velocity constant e g for an inspection machine then the winder must be operated in the pure closed loop velocity controlled mode For closed loop velocity contr
118. N D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Appendix KR0229 ed W eb actual value from the web tachometer IF_CU D901 YP ill encoder 2 KRo301 a301 Effective web velocity setpoint srerz orsteoy pans aso2 Actuaavat LBIANE opsoy KRo305 ago5 Output motorized potentiometera GS ormasoy KRo306_ 4306 Output motorized potentiometer2 GS ormesoy kRoso9 aso9 aaa ep srai AMZ oway pais d312__ Precontroltoque Ss MZ ov Prosoy KRo314 d314__ Pre controltorque friction compensation piamz o7 pozoy KRo316_ a816 Pre control torque inertia compensation Diaz orPssoy KRo317 _ a817 _ Sum tension controller output TENSZonTivoay KRo318_ a818 __ Tension controller D component Tensz ormizasy KR0320 KR0321 KR0322 Ho85 KR0323 KR0324 H097 KR0327 KR0328 KR0329 KR0330 KR0331 KR0339 KR0340 KRo341 a341 Actual saturation setpoint BREG orsszy KRo342 a342 Positive torque imit SREFZO7NCOOSY KRo343 a343 Negative torque imit BREZ ozncooey KRo345 a345 _ Actual Kp speed controller from T400 sReFz _oz ncossy KRo346 a346 Actual Kp tension controler tensz onmizzoy KRo349 a349 Velocity actual value connection tachometer aiz oraneoy kRo350_ a350 Brakingaistanee ss Mz orwony krossi laauen SREFZO7 NCOOZY l HRB Ha pass lass _ cPUutlizationTi Ss iF cu cPu ausastyi KRo353_ a353 CPU utiizatont2 Ss IF cu cPu ausasty2 kRo354 a354
119. NSZ_01 T1500 1 Standstill tension Enters a fixed value or a multiplication factor for the tension setpoint TENSZ_01 T1505 X2 Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Min Max Type 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H190 b d 8 H191 b d 7 H192 b d 8 H193 b d 8 H194 b d 8 H195 b d 8 H196 b d 8 H197 b d 8 H198 b d 8 Tension pre control dancer roll Factor for the tension pre control for closed loop dancer roll control H203 2 0 0 2 0 The main tension setpoint before inhibit is multiplied by this and is added as supplementary torque to the controller output 0 0 2 0 Analog input 5 pressure actual value of the dancer roll is multiplied by the absolute value of the factor and is added as supplementary torque to the controller output TENSZ_07 T1936 X Minimum selection Using H191 1 a minimum selection between the operating tension and standstill tension is activated and the lower of the values is used as standstill setpoint 0 no minimum evaluation
120. R B2003 B B2004 B Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H023 b d 17 H024 b d 17 H025 b d 17 H026 b d 17 H027 b d 17 Input inhibit tension controller The input for the inhibit tension controller command must be connected with the application specific source Default B2005 digital input 3 terminal 55 Alternatively e B2612 for PROFIBUS control word 1 12 from CB e B2652 for peer to peer control word 1 12 from PTP I Q1Z_01 B12 1 Input set diameter The input for the set diameter command must be connected to the application specific source Default B2006 digital input 4 terminal 56 Alternatively e B2614 for PROFIBUS control word 1 14 from CB e B2654 for peer to peer control word 1 14 from CB 1Q1Z_01 B13 1 Input enter supplementary setpoint The input for the enter supplementary setpoint command must be connected to the application specific source Default B2007 digital input 5 terminal 57 Alternatively e B2620 for PROFIBUS control word 2 0 from CB 1Q1Z_01 B14 1 Input local positioning The input for the local positioning command must be connected to the application specific source Default B2008 digital input 6 terminal 58 Alternatively e B2621 for PROFIBUS control word 2 bit 1 1Q1Z_01 B15 1 Input local operator control The local operator control control signal is the prerequisite for local o
121. ROFIBUS slave function The COMBOARD is parameterized on the base drive such as e g PPO type baud rate telegram length etc refer to Lit 2 4 The standard software package defines which data should be transferred It occupies 10 process data Some of them can be freely selected NOTE Various protocol versions are available for the PROFIBUS PPO type 5 is used in this software package This type includes 10 process data each 16 bit words and parameters Data is transferred between the communication modules and the technology module via dual port RAM The process data setpoints and actual values are read or written from the T400 in the fastest cycle time 2 ms Cycle time T400 in the SRT400 Parameterization from the T400 is only realized when the T400 is operated in the standalone mode_ in the SRT400 with COMBOARD at slot 2 Parameters H602 H604 are provided for this special case Enable H288 The configured software can be operated with and without a communications module If the communications module is not used PROFIBUS communications for the configured software can be deactivated using parameter H288 This then relieves the CPU and disables the monitoring function In addition parameters H011 and H012 alarm fault Suppression mask must be appropriately set refer to Chapter 5 Receive data SPW 420 expects a maximum of 10 words of process data from a higher COMBD gt T400 level automation system 8 setpoints and
122. SS monitoring receive telegrams in the communications adapting friction torques for gearbox stage 2 parameterizing possibility via USS interface for T400 in the SRT400 standalone solution communication possibilities via PROFIBUS for standalone solutions in the SRT400 free function blocks for additional customer specific requirements free display parameters for the binectors connectors expansion of gearbox stage 2 10 2 Definition of the 5 cycle times Table 10 1 Definition of the cycle times Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 167 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Appendix 10 3 List of block I O connectors and parameters 10 3 1 List of parameters and connections which can be changed ekg eee er No Parameter which can be changed Value connector B I R W Para significance Chart block connection VO Hoo _ Languageselection IE CU DRIVERLA fo Hoo3 Overtorque limit positive f CONTZ orsuosoru zo Hoo4 Overtorque limit nenas fCONTZ orsuoso a20 fR Hoo5 Initialization time for CU couplings CONTZo1su130T l 20000ms_ RL H007 _ Stall protection thresholdn e F CONTZ or suosoL lans Hoos stall protection threshold F CONTZo1suo9L for H009__ stall protection threshold control deviation conTz o1 su1ooL fos H010 Stall protection responsetime F CONTZo1sui20T lanne R 16H0 H013 input connection tachometeron tz o7 B207A _ esn Hora inchingtime SC CONTZ ozcaz
123. T5 128ms i B i T 0 T 0 f B2 B2862 Sequence in T1 orT5 6 a e ome EHE cate ae one CRE CED i Input ImpV Output INT put ImpV H864 2000 Output Impv Input ImpB H866 2000 Output ImpB B _ B muon o py am q4 m eI s Upper limit INT 0 0 Pulse duration ImpV 0 ms Hass L ulse duration ImpB 0 ms H 867 Lower limit INT 0 0 Integration time INT Oms Setting value INT H854 0 2KR_ __ i Input 1 AND_1 T1 17 Set INT H855 2000 T1 16 H870 2001 ye i output Inv Output AND_1 Input Inv H868 2000 Input 2 AND_2 pet pe H871 2001 B Output LIM i KR i m KR0856 gt i Input 1 OR_1 Input 1 Vergl Upper limit LIM H857 0 i Carag Shh i H876 2000 H880 0 o lBs KR Lower limit LIM H858 0 Output OR_1 B2870 Output1 Vergl DKR Input 2 OR_2 pbi a gt Input 2 Vergl B2870 Output 2 Vergl H877 2000 H881 0 B2870 _ Output 3 Vergl Input LIM H856 0 Input Glaet H883 0 Output Glaet KR kR0883 gt T53 Fixed setpoint 1 0 0 H814 KR0814 Output of H814 Fixed setpoint_3 0 0 H816 KR0816 gt Output of H816 Constant value Smoonthing Setting value Glaet H885 0 KR L Set Glaet H886 2000 i yo ja F
124. TENSZ_01 T1770 B2 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Unit Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type 300 ms 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 128 0 3 128 115 Parameters H199 b d 8 H200 b d 8 H201 b d 8 H202 b d 8 H203 b d 8 H204 b d 7 H205 b d 7 H206 b d 7 H207 b d 8 H208 b d 8 116 Integral action time tension controller Parameter which influences the controller current controller TENSZ_01 T1790 TN Adaptation setpoint pre control Multiplication factor for the pre control of the tension control using the tension setpoint TENSZ_07 T1800 X1 Lower limit web velocity Lower limit for the multiplicative influence of the web velocity for control type H203 5 TENSZ_07 T1900 X2 Influence web velocity Factor with which the web velocity is multiplied for control tyoe H203 5 TENSZ_07 T1920 X2 Selecting the tension control technique Selecting the control technique 0 indirect tension control via the torque limits 1 direct tension control with tension transducer via the torque limits 2 direct tension control with dancer roll via the torque limits 3 direct tension control with dancer _roll tension transducer via t
125. The following should be set e Encoder type e Filter parameterization and filter time constant of the digital filter for the signals from the two pulse tracks zero pulse track e Source of the encoder tracks The recommended values for H217 and H218 are specified in the parameter table in Chapter 5 For more detailed information refer to Lit 6 block NAVS connector MOD Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 T400 technology module Table 2 13 Incremental encoder inputs of the T400 Terminal assignment and switch settings for various encoder types Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 23 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description 3 Function description Overview The standard axial winder software package was developed with the goal of being able to cover many of the known winder applications using one single software package Using the freely configurable T400 technology module and the CFC configuring language universal function units were created which can be easily adapted to the particular system configuration by parameterization Flexible interconnection of the control signals and setpoints allows control from higher level system as well as operator control via the technology module terminals Mixed operation is also possible Software structure The rough structure of the standard SP W420 software package is illustrated in Fig 3 1 1 Reading in setpoints sensing
126. The following operating modes are available modes s Local run H052 Setpoint selection via H075 b d 11 block diagr 16 17 Local crawl H039 Crawl setpoint H142 e Local positioning H026 Setpoint is selected via H091 b d 12 X X characteristic selected using H163 e Local inching forwards H038 inching setpoint H143 e Local inching backwards H040 inching setpoint H144 Control signals Local operation must be enabled via the Local operator control control signal H027 A dedicated control signal is available for each local operating mode The commands are latching i e they are internally saved The commands are mutually interlocked so that only one is effective at any one time In order to exit the run crawl and positioning modes the Local stop command H028 or the Local operator control signal must be withdrawn refer to Chapter 3 3 4 Note When setting up a local operating mode the base drive is powered up main contactor and operation is automatically enabled after the drive ready status has been signaled back Caution The local operator control control signal H027 must remain active until the basic drive shuts down Otherwise the motor will coast down Inching When inching the pulse enable in the base drive is extended by a time which can be parameterized using H014 Before this time expires the inching setpoints can be changed as often as requi
127. Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Type Type Type Value Min Max Type 0 0 2 0 2 0 R 1 0 2 0 2 0 R 0 0 2 0 2 0 R 1 0 2 0 2 0 R 0 0 2 0 2 0 R KR0000 R KR0000 R 0 0 2 0 2 0 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H069 b d 11 H070 b d 11 H071 b d 11 H072 b d 11 H073 b d 11 H074 b d 11 H075 b d 11 H076 b d 11 H077 b d 11 H078 b d 11 Input velocity setpoint The input for the velocity setpoint must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0068 output from H068 fixed value 1Q1Z_01 Al200 X Fixed value web velocity compensation Enters a fixed value as technology parameter 1Q1Z_01 Al210A X Input web velocity compensation The input for the compensation setpoint must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0068 output from H070 fixed value 1Q1Z_01 Al210 X Fixed value supplementary velocity setpoint Enters a fixed value as technology parameter 1Q1Z_01 Al220A X Input supplementary velocity setpoint The input for the supplementary velocity setpoint must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0072 output from H072 fixed value 1Q1Z_01 Al220 X Fixed value set
128. YN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Value Type Type Value Type Type Value Type Type Value Type KROOOO R KROOOO R KROOOO R KR0000 R 139 Parameters d567 b d 25 H570 b d 25 d571 b d 25 H572 b d 25 d573 b d 25 H580 b d 25 d581 b d 25 H600 b d 14a H601 b d 14a 140 Output Anz_R4 Display parameter from H566 1Q2Z_01 Anz_R4 Y Input Anz_B1 Input for the free binector display 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output 1Q2Z_01 Anz_B1 1 Output Anz_B1 Display parameter from H570 1Q2Z_01 Anz_B1 Q Input Anz_B2 Input for the free binector display 2 can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output 1Q2Z_01 Anz_B2 1 Output Anz_B2 Display parameter from H572 1Q2Z_01 Anz_B2 Q Input Anz_I1 Input for the free KR connector display 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default K4000 constant _ output 1Q2Z_01 Anz_l1 X Output Anz_1I1 Display parameter from H580 1Q2Z_01 Anz_l1 Y Enable USS BUS Enable signal for the USS interface on serial interface X01 An OP1S MASTERDRIVES operator control device or SIMOVIS e g SRT400 solution can be connected to this USS interface The USS station address was defin
129. Zustandswon2za2 B2662 Status word 23 fromcU R cU Zustandswon2a3 B2663 laas word 24fromcu IF cU Zustandswon2a4 B2664 Status word 2 5 fromcU IF CULZustandswortz as B2665 Status word 2 6 fromcU IF cU Zustandswon2a6 B2666 Status word 27 romeu IF cU Zustandswon2a7 B2667 Status word 2 8 fromcu IF cU Zustandswon2a8 B2668 Status word 2 9 tromcu IF cU Zustandswor2a9 B2669 Status word 2 10 fromcu IF cUZustandswonz 10 B2670 Status word 2 11 fromcu IF cUZustandswonza11 B2671 Status word 2 12 fromcu IF cUZustandswon2 12 B2672 Status word 2 13 fromcu IF cUZustandswon2 13 B2673 Status word 2 14 fromcu IF cUZustandswonza14 B2674 Status word 2 15 fromcu IF cUZustandswon2 15 B2675 Status word 2 16 fromcu IF cUZustandswon2 16 B2860 Output Ein REV RSE O B2862 Output Ausv FRE BST AUsVQ O o O B2864 Output impv ERELL RST B2866 Output imps FREIBSTmpBa i B2868 _ Output Inv FREI_BST Invt Q B2870 Output AND_1 FREI_BST AND_1 Q fF O B2876 T Output OR 1 FREI_BST OR_1 Q B2880 Output comp FRE BST Vergiqu B2881 Oua Siang FRE BsTvegoe B2882 outputa comp FRE BSTvergon kaoo0 Constant output in ItypeY 0 QZ HLR L Ausgang K4248 d248 Status display PTP receive IF_PEER Empf_PEER YTS 180 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition
130. a B2630 Control word 2 10 fromcB F COMBOG QI1 Hoso B2631 Control wora 2 11 fromcB F comBosar2 unas B2632 Control wora 2 12 fromcg F COMBOG QIa Hoss B2633 Control wora 2 13 fromcg IF COMBOG QI4 Hoss B2634 Control word 2 14 fromcB IF com Bo9 a15 Connection tachom _ B2635 Control wora 2 15 fromcB F comBoosors o B2640 Contro word 1 0 from peertopeer IF_PEER B04 Q1 Main contactorin B2641 Control word 1 1 from peertopeer IF_PEER Bo4 a2 noot2 B2642 Contro word 1 2 from peertopeer IF_PEER Bo4 a3 Noos B2643 Control word 1 3 from peertopeer IF_PEER B04 Q4 Inverter enable B2644 Contro word 1 4 from peer to peer IF_PEER B04 a5 RFGenabe B245 T Control word 1 5 from peer to peer B2646 Controlword 1 6 from peertopeer IF_PEER B04 Q7 RFG setpoint enable B2647 Contro word 1 7 from peertopeer IF_PEER B04 Q8 Acknowledge fault _ B2649 Control word 1 9 from peertopeer IF_PEER B04 Q10 Local inching backw B2651 Controlword 1 11 from peertopeer IF_PEER B04 Q12 Tension controller on B2652 Contro word 1 12 from peertopeer IF_PEER B04 a13_ Tens control inhibit B2653 Cd Control word 1 13 from peer to peer B2654 Control word 1 14 from peer to peer IF_PEER B04 Q15 sadaa B2655 T Cd Control word 1 15 from peer to peer B2660 Status word 2 0 fromcU R CULZustandswora ci B2661 Status word 2 1 fromcu R cU
131. actual values and open loop controls 2 Closed loop control and computation 3 Monitoring Closed loop control Computation Fig 3 1 Rough structure of the standard axial winder software package Description The description of all of the functions follows the rough structure in Fig 3 1 24 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description 3 1 Reading in setpoints 3 1 1 General information block diagrams 11 13 Source for The selection and interconnection of the setpoints to be processed is selection realized using BICO technology Each setpoint can be freely selected from a max of 6 sources The following input signals are available e 5 analog inputs of the T400 module e 10 setpoints from PROFIBUS DP e 5 setpoints from the peer to peer link e 3 setpoints from the CU e 2 motorized potentiometers e 1 fixed setpoint as parameter In the factory setting the setpoints are connected with a fixed setpoint which is generally pre assigned default value 0 0 3 1 2 Speed setpoint block diagram 5 3 1 2 1 Main setpoint The main setpoint of the web speed for the winder drive is selected using parameter H069 block diagram 11 The incoming web speed setpoint is normalized using parameter H139 so that the required speed ratio is obtained for the winder The effective web speed setpoint is available as visualization parameter d301 H069 Source speed setpoint Fr
132. al run 1 active Local crawl 1 active 0 not used Set Vse to stop 1 active Motorized potentiometer 1 raise 1 active Motorized potentiometer 1 lower 1 active Reset length computer 1 active Winding from below 1 active Connection tachometer 1 active 0 not used 1Q1Z_07 B220 QS Control word 3 Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit AARaANTS 0 not used Polarity saturation setpoint 1 active Winder 1 active Gearbox stage 2 1 active Accept setpoint A 1 active Accept setpoint B 1 active 15 0 not used 1Q1Z_07 B230 QS Status word 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Ready to power on 1 active Ready 1 active Operation enabled 1 active Fault 1 active OFF2 0 active OFF3 0 active Power on in hibit 1 active Alarm 1 active Setpoint actual value difference within tolerance Control requested 1 active f n limit reached 1 active Device specific refer to Ref 2 4 also b d 22 Speed controller at its limit 1 active Tension controller at its limit 1 active Device specific 1 active Device specific 1 active e relier to block diagram 22 and Lit 2 4 CONTZ_01 SE120 QS Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual Edition 07 99 6DD1903 0ABO 1 active 1 active Type Type Type Parameters 129 Parameters d336 b d 22 d337 b d 20 d338 b d 20 d339
133. alue of the dancer roll to track the position reference value e g dancer roll center position Generally the position controller outputs a velocity correction setpoint to the speed controller Generally the position reference value is not externally entered but is parameterized as a fixed value i e standard connection of H081 position reference value entered via H080 For dancer rolls using pneumatic or hydraulically controllable support force it is possible to implement a decreasing winding hardness via the winding hardness characteristic of the T400 module To realize this the output signal d328 of the characteristic block is output at an analog output and is used as setpoint for the dancer roll support refer to the configuring examples Chapters 4 9 and 4 10 H203 2 is a non typical behavior for the direct tension control using a dancer roll and the torque limits When the dancer roll is used as actual value transmitter this has the advantage that the dancer roll can simultaneously act as material storage device when the selected stroke has been selected high enough This means that in this case it is already a tension controller Although dancer roll controls are complex they offer unsurpassed control behavior and characteristics The material storage function also has a damping effect on Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 69 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples off cen
134. ameter H276 and the setting pulse duration H278 are required For H277 1 the other technique runs in parallel in the background The actual diameter in front of the ramp function generator can be taken via connector KRO359 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 47 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description External Vact Web tachometer Surface tachometer Ramp function generator Example Additional interlocking External diameter Example a 48 When an external web velocity actual value is used for the calculation this is selected using H094 block diagram 13 and H211 must be set to 1 Gearbox changeover is automatically taken into account When a digital web tachometer is used parameters H213 pulse number H215 rated speed and H218 operating mode must be set for pulse sensing on the T400 refer to Fig 2 2 for the connection configuration When an analog web tachometer is used an analog input is used to sense the tachometer voltage The diameter computer can also be enabled without an active tension controller using a digital signal which can be selected with H013 surface tachometer function b d 9a The web velocity actual value which is used for the computation can be selected using H093 This can be an external analog tachometer as well as a pulse encoder which is connected instead of the web tachometer In order to increase the stability of the closed loop control the diameter change can
135. arameterization required to realize this is specified in Chapter 6 block diagram 3 3 4 4 1 Compensation calculation block diagram 9b Friction effect The friction losses are compensated using a parameterizable polygon characteristic with 6 points This setting is made at start up using parameters H230 to H235 in 0 20 steps refer to Chapter 7 2 2 The outputs of the characteristic can be monitored using d314 For gearbox stage 2 the characteristic output should be adapted by selecting H229 or the fixed value of H128 Accelerating In order to compensate the accelerating torque the variable moment of torque inertia is calculated In this case diameter material thickness H224 width selected using H079 and a possible gearbox changeover selected using H138 are included Together with the fixed moment of inertia after the actual diameter and the internal or external H226 acceleration signal have been taken into account the pre control torque for inertia compensation is obtained which is available at d316 Note The precise setting of the compensation factors is especially important for indirect closed loop tension control so that the torque generating current results in as precisely as possible the material tension refer to Chapter 7 2 3 The compensation factors for friction and acceleration are also effective in the closed loop speed controlled mode e g for acceleration and braking at roll change 46 Axial winder SPW
136. arison value 1Q2Z_01 G330A Q3 Output 4 from limit value monitor 2 Input value comparison value 1Q2Z_01 G330A Q4 Length setpoint reached Signal when the length setpoint has been reached 1Q2Z_01 G130A Q5 Actual value W2 at CB Send word 2 at the CB module can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO310 actual diameter IF_COM Istwert_W2 X Actual value W3 at CB Send word 3 at the CB module can be connected with the application specific source Default KROOOO constant output real type Y 0 0 IF_COM Istwert_W3 X Actual value W5 at CB Send word 5 at the CB module must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant output real type Y 0 0 IF_COM Istwert_W5 X Type B Type B Type B Type B Type B Type B Type B Value KR0310 Type R Value KR0000 Type R Value KR0000 Type R Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 H443 b d 15 H444 b d 15 H445 b d 15 H446 b d 15 H447 b d 15 H448 b d 15 H449 b d 15 d450 b d 2 d451 b d 2 Actual value W6 at CB Send word 6 at the CB module must be connected with the application specific source Default KR001 00 constant output real type Y 0 0 IF_COM Istwert_W6 X Status word 1 at CB Send word 1 at the CB module must be connected with the application specific source Default K4335 status word 1 fro
137. ase drive via backplane bus to the T400 XX the two highest digits 7F Corrects the standstill limit by 127 pulses Caution Initialization required IF_CU D900 MOD Select operating mode web tachometer Value For this software package the only difference between H217 and H218 is at the last Type but one digit refer below Using this parameter the operating mode of the speed sensing block for the web tachometer is set especially the digital filter the encoder type and the coarse signal type selection as well as the source of the encoder pulses Only the factory selected operating mode is described from all of the possible operating modes in the following text For more detailed explanation refer to Lit 1 function block NAV connection MOD X last digit 2 Digital filter with time constant limiting frequency 500 ms 2 MHz Encoder type Pulse encoder with 2 tracks displacing through 90 degrees X last but one digit 0 Zero and incremental pulses from terminal encoder 2 of the T400 Setting mode S 0 Set YP to SV XX the two highest digits 7F Corrects the standstill limit by 127 pulses Caution Initialization required IF_CU D901 MOD Scaling dv dt Value Normalization factor for the dv dt signal Unit The shortest ramp time e g ramp down time for a fast stop should be set at H220 Type where the result of the dv dt calculation should be 1 0 This means H220 ramp time Other inaccura
138. ating the web break signal refer to Chapter 3 6 1 The compensation torques for friction and acceleration are added as supplementary torque setpoints after the speed controller Generally for the dancer roll position control friction compensation is not required and normally inertia compensation is not required Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 lt 13 gt Threading the web Torque characteristic Configuring instructions and examples For a winder with dancer roll there is normally no external tension setpoint For a dancer roll with selectable support force as shown in Fig 4 10 a tension setpoint can be entered at the T400 technology module in order to be able to use its winding hardness control open loop H206 0 The tension setpoint can be still controlled using a ramp function generator with H284 0 The output of the winding hardness characteristic can then be output for example at terminals 97 99 and they can then serve as setpoint for the pneumatic adjustable dancer roll support The normal web velocity setpoint input in this case terminals 90 91 can be used to thread the material web After the web has been thread the parameterized tension is established by switching in the tension control Fig 4 9 Speed torque characteristic with web break Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 81 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples Nip position
139. ax ier D fmax x D kern Ny AV 29 18 1012 i Dmax Py tp Formula characters and dimensions Refer to Sect 4 1 1 7 This equation is obtained if equation 1 6 is inserted in equation 11 and the result is divided by equation 13 it calculates the accelerating torque referred to the rated torque as a 2 Determining the setting value for parameter H227 Formula characters and dimension R efer to Sect 1 8 The equation is valid for the internal dv dt calculation H226 0 and H225 1 0 Example Drive system data specific weight of the wind ing material r 7 85 steel rated motor speed n n 400 RPM gearbox ratio n mot Nwinder shaft i 5 8 maximum diameter D max 1500 mm core diameter D core 508 mm rated motor output P y 187 kW maximum material width D max 420 mm max web velocity NY max 340 m min accelerating time from 0 to V max th 20 sec decelerating time for a fast stop H220 5 sec The following is obtained from equation 1 7 420 7 85 1500 508 400 _ 340 29 18 1012 5 8 1500 187 20 M iv Formula characters and dimensions Refer to Sect 1 9 The following is obtained from equation 1 8 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 65 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples H227 2 36 4 9 44 Formula characters and dimension Refer to Sect 4 1 1 10 For H227 9 44 and a
140. ax 1 0 b d 7 TENSZ_07 T2060 M Type R H276 Initial diameter Value 0 4 The initial diameter for winders unwinders when calculating the diameter without Min 0 0 web speed signal Max 1 0 b d 9a Type R DIAMZ_07 D_Anfang X H277 Enable diameter calculation without V signal Value 0O To change over to the diameter calculation technique without web speed signal Type with V signal 1 without V signal If H277 1 both techniques run in parallel KR0358 output Dact without V signal in front of the ramp function generator 310 indicates Dact after the ramp function generator and check KR0359 output Dac with V signal in front of the ramp function generator The value can be monitored using the freely assignable connector display H560 H566 pets DIAMZ_07 DOV_Freigabe H278 Setting pulse duration Value 10000 The pulse duration to set the initial diameter Min 0 0 atthe first start of the diameter calculation set H278 gt the time for one Units ms revolution to correctly set Dact to D_start H276 Type R For an intermediate start H278 lt the time for one revolution in order to reset the diameter not to D_start H276 but to continue to calculate b d 9a DIAMZ_07 DOV2 T 124 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 H281 b d 18 H282 b d 6a H283 b d 8 H284 b d 7 H285 b d 7 H286 b d 9a H288 b d 15 22a H289 b d 14 22a Alternative On comman
141. b velocity i e H216 Deore 0 60 Vmax ms where D mm and V m min Note The diameter computer operates in the sampling time of T3 16ms the minimal value of H216 32ms will ensure a correct calculation of diameter DIAMZ_01 D1140 X Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value 0 0 Min 2 0 Max 2 0 Type R Value 1 0 Min 2 0 Max 2 0 Type R Value 0 Type B Value 1024 Unit Pulse Type l Value 600 Unit Pulse Type l Value 1500 Unit RPM Type R Value 1000 Unit RPM Type R Value 320 Unit ms Type R 117 Parameters H217 b d 13 H218 b d 13 H220 b d 9b H221 b d 9a 118 Selecting the shaft tachometer operating mode Value Using this parameter the operating mode of the speed sensing block for the winder Type drive is selected especially the digital filter the encoder type and the coarse signal type selection as well as the source of the encoder pulses Only the factory selected operating mode is described from all of the possible operating modes in the following text For more detailed explanation refer to Lit 1 function block NAV connection MOD X last digit 2 Digital filter with time constant limiting frequency 500 ms 2 MHz Encoder type Pulse encoder with 2 tracks displaced through 90 degrees X last but one digit C Setting mode S 0 Set YP to SV Zero and incremental pulses from the b
142. be limited per unit time using H238 H238 should be selected so that the maximum change is still possible this occurs at V max and Dmin The selected rate of change is automatically adapted to the actual diameter Core diameter D gore 140 mm Maximum diameter D max 1000 mm Maximum web velocity V max 200 m min 3333 mm s Material thickness d 1 mm i e 2 mm diameter increase revolution Minimum time for one revolution t H216 D gore TU Vmax 132 ms This results in a maximum diameter change 2 d t 15 15 mm s This value is converted over the complete change D max Deore and entered at H238 H238 Dmax Deore t 2 0 55 s is entered at H238 860 mm 15 15 mm s 56 76 s with a safety factor of 5 An additional interlocking can be enabled using H236 For H236 1 the diameter of a winder can only increase and for an unwinder only decrease This interlocking function is canceled when the diameter is set with Set diameter H024 It is possible to de couple the winder diameter computer and to feed in an externally calculated diameter actual value In this case the Set diameter control signal H024 must be permanently available and the external value entered as diameter setting value this is selected via H089 Diameter actual value from the analog input terminals 92 93 H089 KR0321 set diameter from the digital input terminal 56 H024 B2006 24 V must be connected to te
143. can be used Start up can initially be made without the T400 CU D1 Word Bit Explanation Valu e Selects the control type 0 1 P169 P170 P648 Selects the torque current P Source for control word 1 P734 03 o P734 04 P734 05 P734 06 P233 P234 P235 P236 P554 P555 P558 P561 P565 P575 P443 P585 P506 P493 P499 P232 P734 01 P734 02 Note mS Ie e P554 P555 P558 P561 P565 P575 P443 P585 P506 P493 _ P499 _ P232 148 Z E E ea p734 03 o Pana L P233 H150 Oo 0 control peso fo Source forcontrolword 2 3100 3101 3102 3103 3107 3115 3002 3409 3005 3006 3007 3008 32 167 141 142 Torque actual value smoothed H150 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Base drive parameters P141 Hai2 _ Pulse No aial tach speed actval P143 Hata Rated spesa shat tachom torn as Table 6 1 Parameter setting Note If the open loop brake control function of CUVC MC is used the following parameter settings are required H510 B2509 no operating enable H519 B2001 constant digital output P561 278 inverter enable from the brake P614 3400 no operating enable Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 149 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Commissioning the winder 7 Commissioning the winder Information and instructions are provided in this Chapter whic
144. ce This command is also effective from every other source it is low active Default B2001 constant digital output 1Q1Z_07 B200 I Input ramp function generator stop Value The input for the ramp function generator stop must be connected with the Type application specific source Default B2605 control word 1 5 from CB Alternatively e B2645 for peer to peer control word 1 5 from PTP 1Q1Z_07 B202 1 B2000 B2000 B2600 B2604 B B2001 B2001 B2605 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H050 b d 17 H051 b d 17 H052 b d 17 H053 b d 17 H054 b d 10 H055 b d 10 H056 b d 10 H057 b d 10 H058 b d 10 Input enable setpoint The input for the enable web velocity setpoint must be connected with the application specific source Default B2606 control word 1 6 from CB Alternatively e B2646 for peer to peer control word 1 6 from PTP 1Q1Z_07 B203 1 Input standstill tension on The input to switch in the standstill tension must be connected with the application specific source Default B2613 control word 1 13 from CB Alternatively e B2653 for peer to peer control word 1 13 from PTP 1Q1Z_07 B204 Input local run The input to power up with a local setpoint must be connected with the application specific source Default B2626 control word 2 6 from CB 1Q1Z_07 B205 1 Input reset length compute
145. cies can be compensated using H225 fine adjustment For inertia compensation generally a dv dt signal normalized to10 0 is sufficient and parameters H227 and H228 must then be increased by a factor of 10 In this case the tenth part of the ramp time can be entered at H220 which significantly improves the resolution DIAMZ_01 P148 X2 Minimum speed diameter computer Value When the limit value is fallen below the diameter computation is inhibited Min Max DIAMZ_01 D1030 M Type 16 7FC2 W 16 7F02 W 1000 ms 0 01 2 0 2 0 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H222 b d 9a 12 H223 b d 9b H224 b d 9b H225 b d 9b H226 b d 9b H227 b d 9b H228 b d 9b H229 b d 11 H230 b d 9b H231 b d 9b Core diameter Diameter of the mandrel as a of the maximum diameter DIAMZ_01 P100 X Smoothing setpoint for dv dt computation Smoothing for display parameter d331 DIAMZ_01 P142 T Material density Specifies the density of the winder material as a of the maximum density DIAMZ_07 P295 X1 Fine adjustment dv dt If the normalization factor H220 for the dv dt signal is not be able to be precisely set as a result of longer ramp up times this inaccuracy is compensated with the fine adjustment For example with a 50s up ramp possible setting at H220 52 42s with H225 50s 100 H220 95 38 the dv dt output is 100 for a 50s ramp
146. control block diagram 7 sss sese eee eee seeren 30 3 1 3 2 Standstill tension block diagram 7 sese essere ceeeetteeeeettaeeeees 31 3 2 Sensing actual VAlUSS TTT 32 3 2 1 Selecting the speed actual value block diagram 13 sse eee eee eee ceeaeeeees 32 3 2 2 Speed actual value Calibration sees eee eee K seeneeeeneed 33 Kec nie TTT 34 3 3 1 Control signals block diagrams 16 17 22D eee eee caeeeessaaeeetsaaaeees 34 3 3 2 WiNdING direction seisein aa aaa aa ia ia EE 35 3 3 3 Gearbox stage changeover block diagram 5 sss eee eee sesrrrssrrrrsssssns 35 3 3 4 Two operating modes block diagram 18 sss sese eee sirrsrerrsssrrnnssernsssrns 36 3 3 5 Motorized potentiometer functions block diagram 19 sss esse sees serren 38 3 3 6 Splice control block diagram 21 sss sees serere 39 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 3 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Warning information 3 4 Closed loop ee T 41 3 4 1 Closed loop control structure block diagram 4 sss eee eee ceeeseeeeeeenaeees 41 3 4 2 Closed loop speed control block diagram 6 6a sss sss eee eee ceeeneeeeeeeaeees 41 3 4 2 1 Influence of the speed controller block diagram 6 sese eee 41 3 4 2 2 Kp adaptation block diagram 6a sese K 42 3 4 3 Closed loop tension dancer roll position control block diagram 7 8 sss 43 3 431 KpadaptatiN i ra a Slane sda a aaa a Save ead aN 44 3 4 3 2 D component of the t ension controller block diagram 7 sss sese eee 45 3 4 4 Generating the supp
147. control as a function of the diameter and tension setpoint two techniques to calculate the diameter i e with without V set signals diameter calculation with a control function for Set diameter and Hold diameter web length calculation it is possible to changeover between several gearbox stages free function blocks for additional user specific requirements freely assignable display parameters to visualize the actual value of the connector binector data transfer to the base drive converter and via PROFIBUS DP peer to peer USS and digital or analog I O possible versatile as it is possible within the standard axial winder software to freely interconnect analog and digital inputs analog and digital outputs as well as parts of the dual port RAM to the interface module and to the base drive using BICO technology start up program optional web break detection and the appropriate measures automatic standstill identification and switching to standstill tension monitoring of all communication interfaces winder related open loop control with alarm and fault evaluation automatic protection against web sag suitable for winders and unwinders with and without flying reel change for changeover mechanical system inching positioning and crawl operation two motorized potentiometers which can be freely used shutdown without overshoot with braking characteristic for fast stop tension transducer or da
148. coupling rie Torque actual value 3 8 152 6 Receive CU faulted 19 92s Setting value Receive block status Receive PTP faulted Monitoring time Receive CB faulted ar time Receive block status lt a os Leese H 7 9 92s H247 Setting value K4248_ gt gt 10 500 ms 0 02 delay time anti stall protection n Stall protection iis Speed setpoint 6 8 Stall protection control difference ignal act 1 if n lt H007 and i gt H008 and Dn gt H009 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 Monitoring drive fault and alarm message Alarm from T400 Alarms from T400 22 5 K4337_ gt Alarms from T400 amma A097 to A104 Fault from T400 oe Faults from T400 22 3 22 5 16 0 K4338_ gt Fault mask Faults from T400 F116 to F123 Faults and alarms from the T400 The faults and alarms signaled from the T400 are coded bitwise a 0 in the appropriate bit position of the mask inhibits the particular message signal e g for H012 the same as OF7 hex bit 3 0 overcurrent position is suppressed as fault The monitoring of communications to CU CB and the PTP interface is only activated after a time which can be selected using H005 H495 and H246 Faults in communications to CB and PTP interface are only signaled if the time for receiving the first valid telegram or the time interval between two sequent telegrams from the particular interface was over refer to H495 496 and H
149. ction generator inhibit _ B2604 Control word 1 4 from CB Command to re config CB B2605 Ramp function generator stop Control word 1 5 from CB only for SRT400 Ramp function generator setpoint enable B2606 Control word 1 6 from CB c Control word 1 Acknowledge fault B2607 Control word 1 7 from CB Konis Tor SATAO from CB Local inching forwards B2608 Control word 1 8 from CB y Local inching backwards B2609 Control word 1 9 from CB Monitoring time 20000ms lt 1 gt Control from PLC B2610 E Control word 1 10 from CB telegram failure B2611 Tension controller on Control word 1 11 from CB Tension controller inhibit B2612 Control word 1 12 from CB Setting value 19920 ms Standstill tension on Control word 1 13 from CB Set diameter Control word 1 14 from CB lt I gt refer to Sheet 2 and 15 Hold diameter Control word 1 5 from CB lt 2 gt refer to Sheet 2 and 15 Enter supplementary setpoint Vt Control word 2 0 from CB 2 Local positioning o o o o oo Control word 2 1 from CB 3 4 MOP 2 raise Control word 2 2 from CB 44 MOP 2 lower B2623 Control word 2 3 from CB 5 Local control B2624 Control word 2 4 from CB 6 4 Local stop Es Control word 2 5 from CB Control word 2 71 Local run B2626 Control word 2 6 from CB from CB 8 Local crawl Control word 2 7 from CB B2628 Control word 2 8 from CB lt 1 gt 10 T Set Vset to stop B2629
150. d To activate the alternative Power on n_command 1Q1Z_01 SELACT 1 Changing over the speed controller to CU or T400 The speed controller is switched through bypassed if an external speed controller is to be used 1 yes this means that the controller on the T400 operates as speed controller and transfers the torque setpoint 0 no i e T400 transfers the speed setpoint to CU taking into account the limits Further the speed controller block processing is disabled in order to minimize CPU utilization 1Q1Z_07 B51 1 controller enable 0 With Pl component in the tension controller for the dancer roll and H196 1 1 Only component in the tension controller for other techniques and H196 0 TENSZ_01 T1790 IC Tension setpoint inhibit ramp function generator 0 For dancer roll 1 For others TENSZ_01 T1320 12 Enable web break detection 0 Without web break detection the web break detection blocks are also disabled to minimize CPU utilization 1 With web break detection TENSZ_07 Bahnrisserken Thickness diameter ratio The relative ratio between the material thickness and maximum diameter i e H286 material thickness max diameter DIAMZ_07 OV6 X1 Enable PROFIBUS Enables the PROFIBUS communications interface and its monitoring in order to reduce CPU utilization if PROFIBUS is not available 0 The complete PROFIBUS module is inhibited 1 PROFIBUS interface is enabled 1Q1Z_01 B01 1 Enable peer to peer
151. d SPW420 axial winder software version 2 0 Motorized potentiometers 1 and 2 R Setpoint Setpoint for RFG operation 1 0 Upper limit 1 2 Lower limit 1 2 R KR0305_7 Motorized potentiometer 1 Setting value 10000 ms 2609 Ramp up ramp down time as RFG Ramp up time JY 25000 ms Ye y i Fast rate of 000 ms hass ins Ramp down time 100000 msL_H266 d Sms Operator control motorized potentiometers Norm rate of change 1 Motorized potentiometer raise lower lt 300ms Motorized potentiometer output is incremented or decremented by 0 00001 1Bit 2 Motorized potentiometer raise lower between 300ms and 4s Motorized potentiometer output goes to H265 or H263 up or down 3 Motorized potentiometer raise lower gt 4s Motorized potentiometer output goes to H266 or H264 up or down Motorized potentiometer 1 as ramp function generator For H267 1 motorized potentiometer 1 acts as ramp function generator The ramp up ramp down time is set at H269 The setpoint is entered at H268 Upper limit 1 2 Lower limit 1 2 4 Setting value KR0306 gt Motorized potentiometer 2 Ramp up time Fast rate of change 25000 ms Normal rate of change 100000 ms _H264 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet 19 Speed actual value smoothed 13 6 KR0307 Overspeed positive 2 zs A2 Overspeed negative Overtorque positive a330 Torque actual value 7 4 X QM 1 2 Lu 1 Delay to enable CU
152. d by identifying an overspeed condition If an overspeed condition is identified i e the determined speed actual value is greater than the positive limit value or less than the negative limit value if required the drive is shutdown with a fault message fault number 116 or 117 Note An overspeed condition is only identified if the speed actual value sensing works correctly Parameter Parameter name Explanation H125 Overspeed positive Limit value referred to the rated speed H126 Overspeed negative Limit value referred to the rated speed Table 3 22 Parameters for overspeed identification 3 6 5 Excessive torque When an excessive torque is identified i e the torque actual value from the base drive is greater than the positive limit value or less than the negative limit value If required the drive is shutdown with a fault signal fault number 118 or 119 Parameter Parameter name Explanation H003 Excessive torque positive Limit value referred to the rated torque H004 Excessive torque negative Limit value referred to the rated torque Table 3 23 Parameters for excessive torque identification 54 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description 3 6 6 Stall protection This function has the task of identifying if the drive has stalled for instance can no longer mechanically move The drive can be shutdown with a fault signal output The stall signal is derived from the ac
153. dition 07 99 Overview functions of the standard software packages have to be expanded to fulfill specific customer requirements then the software packages can be purchased on CD ROM and then modified with the graphics CFC configuring tool from version 4 0 The standard software packages can run with and without interface module e g CBP CB1 Note Getting to know the software and commissioning 1 Configuring examples refer to Chapters 4 7 to 4 13 2 Block diagrams b d refer to Appendix Chapter 10 4 3 Controlling the configured winder software package via CBP CB1 peer to peer and terminals refer to the block diagram Sheets 1 3a 19 22 22b 1 2 1 T400 technology module The T400 technology module is a processor module which can be freely configured using CFC It is compatible to SIMADYN D and has been especially designed for use with the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES SIMOREG DC MASTER drive converters and SRT400 subracks The graphical CFC configuring tool is used to define the function of the various modules The generated software is downloaded into a program memory of the T400 Table 1 1 shows an overview of the characteristics of the T400 The communications with the base drive is realized via a parallel interface which is also implemented as dual port RAM DPR In addition the T400 can communicate via PROFIBUS DP the USS bus and peer to peer links Refer to Chapter 2 for details Processor clock RISC R30
154. dy Operation enabled run Fault No Off3 No Off2 Power on inhibit Alarm Setp act value diff within the tol bandw Control requested f n limit reached Fault undervoltage Main contactor energized Ramp function generator active Clockwise rotating field Kinetic buffering active only CUVC CU2 OONO QE GMA K4335_ gt Status word 1 from T400 14 1 15 3 o ext status word 12 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 aa kek h OU EG M 20 8 Fault T400 20 8 Alarm T400 Tension control at its limit System start Local stop No Off 3 Local run Local crawl Local inching forwards Local inching backwards Local positionin J B2505 Speed Use s0 K4336_ gt B2501 Web break On Contre isin Status word 2 from T400 S System TE Speed actual value is D B2506 Limit value monitor 1 4 1 U 15 3 J B2507 Limit value monitor 4 Local operator control selected W GOU WHY Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Control and status words to from CU status words from T400 Sheet 22 1 Main contactor on H_ B2600 Control word 1 0 from CB PROFIBUS enable B2601 Control word 1 1 from CB No Off 3 B2602 Control word 1 2 from CB Peer to peer enable Inverter enable B2603 _ Control word 1 3 from CB Ramp fun
155. e for the diameter computation instead of the value selected from H094 Default KRO401 output from H401 fixed value 1Q1Z_01 AI329 X Input external web velocity actual value The input for an external web velocity actual value must be activated with H211 1 The input must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0402 output from H402 fixed value 1Q1Z_01 AI330 X Fixed value setpoint A Enters a fixed value as technology parameter 1Q1Z_01 AI340A X Input setpoint A The input for setpoint A must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0095 output from H095 fixed value 1Q1Z_01 A1340 X Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Type KR0088 R 0 0 2 0 2 0 R KR0090 R KR0550 R KR0401 R KR0402 R 0 0 2 0 2 0 R KR0095 R 105 Parameters H097 b d 13 H098 b d 10 H099 b d 10 H100 b d 10 H101 b d 10 H102 b d 10 H103 b d 10 H107 b d 10 H108 b d 10 H109 b d 10 106 Input pressure actual value dancer roll The input for the measured value from the dancer roll can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0324 analog input 5 TENSZ_07 T1937 X2 Analog outp
156. e setpoint provided is already available at the ramp function generator output e g winder as slave drive setpoint from the central machine control or from another drive The ramp function generator can also be used as smoothing element e g for entering a setpoint from a web velocity tachometer The ramp up and ramp down times should be set somewhat lower than the web velocity changes which occur Note Using the Input supplementary setpoint command H025 a setpoint source which can be selected with H073 is added directly in front of the speed controller block diagram 5 26 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description H021 Source system start Command system start refer to Chapter 5 H025 Source input supplementary Command input supplementary setpoint setpoint H034 Source velocity setpoint set to Command velocity setpoint set to stop stop H036 Source accept setpoint A Command accept setpoint A H037 Source accept setpoint B Command accept setpoint B H045 Source Off1 On Command Off1 On main contactor H049 Source ramp function generator Command ramp function generator stop stop H073 Source suppl velocity setpoint Refer to Chapter 5 H096 Source setpoint A Selects the source for setpoint A refer to Chapter 5 H130 Setpoint B Fixed value as velocity setpoint is entered with the Accept setpoint B control signal H037 in front of the ramp functio
157. eb velocity is divided by the diameter calculated when winding This means that the speed controller is supplied the correct speed setpoint which in turn results in the fact that the circumferential velocity of the roll coincides with the web velocity In order to be able to develop a motor torque for operation with the closed loop torque limiting control parameter H145 is added to the actual setpoint as saturation setpoint Thus it is ensured that the drive remains torque controlled when the material web is intact the speed controller is overcontrolled with the correct sign When the material web breaks the motor only accelerates by the supplementary value of the basic speed setpoint saturation setpoint For most of the applications H145 is set between 0 05 and 0 10 Parameter Parameter name Explanation H044 Source polarity saturation To changeover the polarity of the saturation setpoint setpoint H145 Saturation setpoint Supplementary setpoint for the velocity setpoint for the closed loop torque limiting control H164 Smoothing saturation setpoint Smoothing time for the saturation setpoint d341 Actual saturation setpoint Display parameter Table 3 5 Overcontrol parameter 3 1 3 Setpoint for the closed loop tension position controller block diagram 7 8 Main tension The setpoint source is selected using H081 For closed loop position setpoint controls using a dancer roll a fixed position reference value can be entered
158. echnique via H203 Indirect tension control via current limits Direct tension control with tension transducer via current limits Direct tension control with dancer roll via current limits Direct tension control with dancer tension tranducer via speed correction As for setting 3 however tension controller output multiplied via V Reserved for expansions KR0304 gt Sum a tension position reference value Control technique tension controller H203 0 1 5 3 KR0319 gt Tension controller output PI component KR0317 gt Sum tension contr output a318 9 4 gt KRO318 gt Tension controller D comp Differentiating time constant 800 ms Inhibit D controller Tension controller at its limit Status word 1 13 to CB CU Influence web velocity KR0313 gt Output tension control 5 1 6 1 7 4 9b 8 pre control torque K poas RS 0 0 Pre control torque is switched to 0 0 for speed correction control H203 3 4 5 Control technique 0 Lower limit tension controller SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet 8 Core diameter Dcore Dmax v_Correction 5 4 300m H211 0 Web tacho 1 gt KR0349 eS e Smoonthing Adaptation det Adaptation v_web Compensated velocit without gearbox Ral K KR0327 external web velocity actual value 13 4 Velocity from tachometer 13 4 Set diameter 17 8 Hold diameter 16 4 Web break 1 7
159. ed as O The baud rate was set to 9600 Please observe the following the hardware switches S1 1 S1 2 and S1 8 are inthe ON setting the setting of H601 1Q1Z_01 B03 USS data transfer line Set the data transfer line at connector X01 0 RS485 2 wire 1 RS232 IF_USS Slave_ZB WI4 Type R Value B2000 Type B Type B Value B2000 Type B Type B Value K4000 Type Type Value 1 Type B Value 0 Type B Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H602 b d 15 22a H603 b d 15 H604 b d 15 H610 b d 6 H611 b d 6 H612 b d 6 H650 b d 23a 23b H800 b d 23a H801 b d 23a H802 b d 23a Command to re configure CB For an SRT400 solution T400 configures a COMBOARD For each online configuration a positive edge is required at H602 0 1 IF_COM CB_SRT400 SET CB station address Only enter the address if there is a communications board CBx in the subrack SRT400 e g for PROFIBUS DP 3 125 IF_COM CB_SRT400 MAA PPO type PROFIBUS Enters the telegram structure only for the SRT400 solution This configuring permits the following telegram structure PPO type 5 10 PZD 4 PKW IF_COM CB_SRT400 P02 Input positive torque limit Input positive torque limit can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO351 torque limit SREFZ_07 NC005 X2 Input negative torque limit Input negati
160. ed diameter J D Deorel 7 2 4 2 Setting for CUVC or CUMC Procedure Refer to the block diagram of CUVC or CUMC Sheet 360 in Lit 2 3 and Table 3 13 or Table 6 1 in this Manual P233 0 P234 100 corresponding to H152 1 0 for an empty smallest mandrel the speed controller kp is optimized as usual using parameter P235 optimize the speed controller again using P236 with the largest possible diameter web width and specific weight The effective kp can be read at parameter r237 of the base drive 7 2 5 Setting the tension or dancer roll controller block diagram 7 8 For tension transducer 158 When the tension is measured using a tension transducer check the control sense corresponding to the recommended configuring If the polarity sign is incorrect either re connect at the analog input or invert the polarity using a multiplier function Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Commissioning the winder a possible tension transducer offset can be compensated using H179 1 The instantaneous tension actual value is saved and can be subsequently subtracted as offset by activating the control signal Hold diameter when the tension controller is inactive the maximum input voltage at the analog input for the tension actual value should not exceed 9 V The input must be calibrated using the appropriate multiplier so that the maximum
161. eely connectable from the source refer to Chapter 5 H127 Fixed value ratio gearbox stage 2 Ratio between gearbox stages 1 and 2 in refer to Chapter 5 H138 Source ratio gearbox stage 2 Refer to Chapter 5 H139 Normalization web speed Refer to Chapter 5 d301 Effective web speed setpoint After normalization and taking into account a gearbox stage changeover Table 3 1 Parameters to set the speed setpoint 3 1 2 2 Stretch compensation for a speed setpoint The main web speed setpoint can be influenced to provide stretch compensation if the material thickness is to be reduced before winding e g by stretching or expansion To realize this a compensation setpoint should be selected using parameter H071 A fixed value is selected via H070 presetting 0 0 with the standard H071 connection The web speed compensation can be normalized using parameter H137 Note The web speed compensation should only be set if a deviation has been identified between the web speed setpoint and actual value This Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 25 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description difference influences among other things the accuracy of the diameter computation and the speed of the winding shaft at the flying roll change H070 Fixed value web speed compensation o H071 Source web speed compensation Freely connectable from the source refer to Chapter 5 H137 Normalized speed compensation o Table 3 2 Paramete
162. enerally at 1 0 When determining the controller gain with if possible a full roll the associated variable moment of inertia can be read as display parameter 44 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description d308 or can calculated using the known diameter The following is valid for gearbox stage 1 constant material thickness and width J D Deore The factor which is entered as K pmax Must be referred to 100 Jy i e Kp max determined K p 100 determined J For the basic winder setting with K p min Kp max adaptation is not effective and the actual value of K is displayed using d346 Note We recommend that the kp adaptation is commissioned for winding ratios gt 3 3 4 3 2 D component of the tension controller block diagram 7 The differential component of the tension controller is used to compensate the phase rotation which is caused by an integral loop element dancer roll If the tension is measured using a transducer the differential component must be disabled H174 1 since the control loop has PT1 characteristics For closed loop dancer controls H174 0 H196 1 and H283 0 without or with a low derivative action time the controller may oscillate These can be effectively suppressed by increasing H173 Note The duration of an actual value oscillation period without D component is a good approximation of the time constant of the d
163. entered with H143 Local closed loop velocity controlled operation is selected with H146 0 Procedure enter the actual diameter as setting value and select via H089 activate the setting command check via d310 For winding generally the core diameter H222 empty mandrel is used as reference and then H089 should be set to connector KR0222 ramp up the web velocity setpoints to a defined low value e g 0 10 check at d3 44 check the circumferential velocity at the roll using the handheld tachometer if required correct the speed calibration H214 on the T400 or Pxxx in the basic drive refer to Table 6 1 refer to Chapter 3 2 2 After each significant change in the speed actual value calibration the speed controller must be re optimized with an empty roll Caution check the polarity of the speed actual value and if required change check the torque direction When the winder is rotating in the direction of the material web and winding from above the speed actual value and torque setpoint must be positive refer to Chapter 4 5 7 2 2 Compensation friction torque block diagram 9b Note Generally the friction component is dependent on the shaft speed of the winder For most winder designs the weight of the wound material only has a low influence Principle The friction compensation can only compensate for friction values which are speed dependent but which otherwise do not change
164. et to 0 Bit 76543210 Value 00111111 thus for H011 H012 3F Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 165 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Literature 9 Literature 166 SIMADYN D T400 technology module Brief Description 1998 SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Guidelines for changing over from control module CU2 to CUVC Order No E20125 J0006 V021 A1 1998 SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Motion Control Compendium Order No 6SE7080 0QX50 1998 6RA70 SIMOREG DC MASTER Description Order No C98130 A1256 A1 02 7447 1998 Hardware SIMADYN D Manual Order No 6 lt DD1987 1BA1 1997 SIMADYN D Function Block Library Reference Manual Order No 6DD1987 1CA1 Oct 1997 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Appendix 10 Appendix 10 1 Version changes Version 2 0 First edition 30 09 98 The standard SPW420 software package functions correspond to those of the standard MS320 software package Version 1 3 for 6SE70 71 Adaptation The following adaptations have been made conversion to CFC V4 0 use of the T400 module Expansion New or improved functions introduction of the BICO technology automatic protection against material sagging for the torque limiting control D controller for the dancer control diameter calculation without V set signal acceleration calculation enable for web break detection enable for communications PROFIBUS peer to peer and U
165. eter as tension actual value generator whereby the tension controller acts on the speed controller via a speed correction setpoint This control technique should be used if a dancer roll is used If there is a tension transducer then this control technique is occasionally used for elastic extremely expandable materials e g thin plastic foils Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 43 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description H203 4 Presently not used free for making expansions H203 5 As for H203 3 however the tension controller output can be multiplied by the web velocity signal With parameter H201 the lower limit value is defined for the multiplying effect of the web velocity on the tension controller output It can be normalized using parameter H202 Tension position The tension controller is a proportional integral differential controller controller PID whose integral action time and differentiating time constant can be set using parameters H199 and H173 With H196 1 and H283 0 the controller acts as a pure proportional controller or proportional differential controller depending on the setting H174 inhibits the D controller If a dancer roll is used then the tension controller operates as dancer roll position controller Note For applications with tension transducer or dancer roll in the speed correction mode H203 3 or 5 the tension controller is operated as usual as proportional differen
166. f Connectable parameter B in B type Name Connected binnector in B type Signal to Sheet column Signal from Sheet column Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Explanation of parameter bin connector and signal in the block diagram Sheet Ob Send data Receive data Interface module CBP CB1 DUAL PORT RAM Send_COM Parameter Empft_COM Send data to the Receive data from the communications interface module module Terminals 45 66 80 99 Terminals 67 75 2 pulse encoder inputs Serial interface 1 5 analog inputs program download CFC online 2 analog outputs USS SIMOVIS Technology module T400 8 digital inputs 4 bidirectional digital inputs outputs Serial interface 2 Peer to peer ra USS 2 digital outputs DUAL PORT RAM Empt_BASE Parameter Send_BASE Receive data from Send data to the base drive the base drive Base drive CUVC CUMC CUD1 Operator panel PMU OP1S Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D DS R Overview terminals DPRAMS Sheet 1 Peer to peer protocol SIMADYN D Monitor PROFIBUS DB protocol PPO 5 Word No Significance receive Parameter identification Send_PEER Send data via PTP Index Enable H289 Send_BASE Send data to CU Parameter value in 4 bytes AMEE No Signfcance Control word 1 from CB Bit 1 0to 1 15 15 17 22a Status word 1 14 Setpoint 2 from CB 15 Actual value 2 14 G Refer to S
167. ff time Ramp up time Main input quantity actual value Main output quantity actuating quantity Acceleration dv dt Control error component Inhibit component Inhibit P component Diameter Speed Wal g Ramp function generator x Divider Y X1 X2 a Subtractor Y X1 X2 Exclusive or Maximum value x1 M X2 K RZ maximum of 1 and X2 Neh 1 R Absolute value generator Sign reversal ib ae Ja F Differentiating element fy Monoflop LU ah LL LC Limiter LL lt Y lt LU Changeover switch IW Yerely position l 0 shown Switch on delay retriggerable _ Switch off delay 7 retriggerable Conversion binary quantity into bytes word quantity _ Block to save X at power failure PT1 element Flip Flop A D converter SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 Explanation of abbreviations and symbols Sheet 0a Explanation of the parameter bin connector and signal in the block diagram Technology parameter Binnector and connector N Connectable connector in R type Name Value Changeable parameter ame 16 Name a330 Display parameter Name Connectable connector in l type B2001 Name Connectable binnector in B type Name H123 def sate oe KR KR0850 Connected connector in R type Name H125 def Connectable parameter K in l type Connected connector in l type Name H123 de
168. figuring examples Chapters 4 7 and 4 8 It is important that the friction and accelerating torques are precisely compensated so that the pre controlled torque setpoint results in a material web tension which is as close as possible to that required For this control type it must be ensured that the mechanical losses are kept as low as possible i e no worm gears no open intermediate ratios for herring bone teeth direction of rotation in the direction of the arrow the lowest possible loss differences between warm and cold gears 4 6 2 Direct closed loop tension control with dancer roll Tension measurement Concept H203 3 or 5 Note Advantage Note The material web is routed over a dancer roll The dancer roll tries to move the material web with a defined force This deflection of the dancer roll is sensed using a potentiometer e g field plate potentiometer and is used as a measure for the material tension The material tension depends on the return force of the dancer roll suspension Often due to the geometry of the arrangement distance to possibly existing guide rolls and the weight of the dancer roll additional effect on the tension actual value Using a good mechanical design the effects can be eliminated or adequately minimized The higher level controller to the speed controller designated as tension controller is used as the closed loop dancer roll position controller and corrects the position actual v
169. from CB B2601 Enable PROFIBUS 0 H288 22a 3 Control word 1 1 from PTP D B2641 Enable PTP 01 H289 Local positioning 18 1 gt 1 H026 2008 B2008 JB Digital input 6 term 58 13a 3 Partner drive is in closed loop tension control 21 1 H170 2000 B2000 B Constant digital output 0 Local operator control 5 1 6 1 18 1 18 6 H027 2009 B2009 B Digital input 7 term 59 13a 3 H028 2010 B2010 _ B Digital input 8 term 60 13a 3 Input Off 3 Constant digital output 1 H048 2001 B0001 B 21 8 No fast stop after splice 22a 4 Contr word 1 2 from CB Enable PROFIBUS 0 qd 22a 5 Control word 1 2 from PTP 1 Enable PTP o H289 d 7 Standardprojektierung Achswickler SPW 420 Version 2 0 Inputs for control commands pre assigned digital inputs terminals H053 2632 B2632 B No Off 3 6 6 6a 6 18 1 18 6 22 5 Reset length computer 13 6 Control word 2 12 from CB 22a 7 Local stop 18 1 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet 17 Base drive ready Fault base drive Fault from T400 No Off 2 17 3 No Off 3 17 3 Local stop 17 8 amp Local operator control 17 8 Local crawl 16 6 Local run 17 4 Local positioning 17 8 Interlocking with other local modes Local inching forwards 16 6 Local inching backwards 16 6 Offt on 16 8 Local oper control 1
170. from T400 Display parameter if H282 1 d331 Smoothed torque setpoint calculated Display parameter if H282 1 from T400 d345 Actual Kp adaptation from T400 Display parameter Table 3 14 Parameters for the speed controller on T400 3 4 3 Closed loop tension dancer roll position control block diagram 7 8 Control methods In order to control the material tension for the standard axial winder software package five different control techniques are implemented H203 is used to select one of the following possibilities H203 0 Indirect closed loop tension control with direct open loop torque control via the torque limit values This is the preferred solution for indirect closed loop tension control H203 1 Direct closed loop tension control using a tension transducer whereby the tension controller regulates the torque via the torque limit values This is the preferred solution if a tension transducer is used H203 2 Direct closed loop tension control using a dancer roll potentiometer as tension actual value generator The dancer roll closed loop position controller regulates open loop the torque via the torque limit values This control technique is seldomly used it may under certain circumstances be practical for extremely sensitive brittle or hard materials which are not very flexible e g cables textiles paper etc H203 3 Direct closed loop tension control using a tension transducer or a dancer roll potentiom
171. g Enable Suppression 162 The factory setting assumes that datais not received via peer to peer If a peer to peer link is required the following parameters must be adapted H289 1 Peer to peer enable H011 Enable alarm suppression bit7 1 H012 Enable fault suppression bit8 1 H246 H247 telegram monitoring time Suppresses this alarm and fault or others are effective with bit7 0 in H011 and H012 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Note Commissioning the winder H011 7F H012 7F Otherwise the following message is displayed on the PMU in the drive converter alarm A104 and fault F123 Refer to Chapter 8 2 7 5 Operation with USS slave T400 in the SRT400 The factory setting assumes one USS slave connection This interface is only used for parameterization in special cases where the T400 is used in the SRT400 subrack In this case the following setting is required refer to Table 2 7 in Chapter 2 1 4 H600 1 USS slave enable H601 0 RS485 2 wire 1 8 on T400 into the ON position Fixed setting in the software package baud rate 9600 station address 0 7 6 Operation with free function blocks Factory setting The factory setting assumes that non of the free blocks are being used Enable The following points must be observed if a customer specific function is also to be implemented using free function blocks H650
172. g 4 6 Example for an unwind stand with indirect tension control 3 Page 3 in the block diagram lt 2 gt Information in the text 76 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples 4 9 Configuring example Winder with dancer roll speed correction Note lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt lt 9 gt lt 10 gt lt 13 gt An example of a winder with dancer roll is shown in Fig 4 8 The web velocity setpoint is entered here at terminals 90 91 as analog signal An analog tachometer is used for the speed actual value sensing The signal is connected at the base drive and the actual value is transferred to T400 via the dual port RAM The diameter computer continually computes the diameter corresponding to the following formula web velocity diameter speed The analog dancer roll position actual value is connected at terminals 96 99 The dancer roll position setpoint is permanently entered via parameter H082 with the standard connection of H083 normally the voltage is set at the dancer roll center position The tension setpoint channel is interrupted with H177 1 and the winding hardness characteristic can then be used to control the dancer roll support The tension controller operates as dancer roll position controller and normally generates a supplementary velocity setpoint
173. h should allow the axial winder to be started up as quickly as possible Only start to commission the system if adequate and effective measures have been made to safely operate the system and the drive both electrically and mechanically Carefully check that all of the safety and EMERGENCY OFF signals are connected and are effective so that the drive can be shutdown atany time Procedure R Commission the base drive and install the supplementary modules used according to the appropriate Instruction Manuals R The drive converters are always operated in the closed loop speed controlled mode e g for CUVC P100 4 the speed is sensed at the base drive The pulse encoder is connected to the base drive and the pulse signals are transferred to the T400 via the backplane bus H217 7FC2 R For the axial winder two optimization runs should be made for the speed controller one only with the mandrel and the other as far as possible with a full roll before the drive converter is re parameterized for the standard software package SPW 420 E Parameterize the drive converter refer to Table 6 1 Caution It is only possible to commission the winder after the base drive has been correctly commissioned 7 1 Information on commissioning All of the settings to parameterize this standard software package are made via the technology parameters Hxxx The standard software package monitors the communications to CUxy CBx and to it
174. h tension transducer tension control using a dancer roll d307 value r269 for CUVC r219 for CUVC H145 Tension setpoint actual Tension Position reference 1 d341 a as setpoint value actual value d304 d304 d317 C positive negative negative positive positive positive gt 0 0 5 negative negative negative positive positive positive positive 20 0 5 positive Table 4 2 Defining the polarities signs Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 67 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples Explanation 1 Only set the saturation setpoint for closed loop torque limiting controls H203 0 1 2 otherwise enter 0 0 2 The unwinder can also changeover from braking to motoring e g at low diameters or at low tension 3 When inching forwards without material positive polarity 4 When inching backwards without material negative polarity 5 The tension actual value depends on the dancer roll setting Winders Dancer roll at the top Winder is running too fast tension actual value gt tension setpoint Dancer roll at the bottom Winder is running too slowly tension actual value lt tension setpoint Dancer roll at the center Winder is running with V set tension setpoint tension actual value Unwinder Dancer roll at the top Unwinder is running too slowly tension actual value gt tension setpoint Dancer roll at the bottom Unwinder is running too fast tensio
175. hapter 4 2 2 For gearboxes with a high ratio frequently the component of the variable moment of inertia can be neglected Procedure Determine H227 by accelerating along a defined ramp insert a roll which is as full as possible set the diameter to the actual value and check at d310 Enter the web width H079 possibly 1 0 and the material density H224 possibly 1 0 enter a setpoint using H068 and activate the command OFF 1 and System start read out r033 for CUVC P032 01 155 in the range 10 90 of the speed setpoint enter the monitored average value in the floating point format at H227 Or parameter H227 is adjusted until the component of the speed controller r033 goes to 0 for CUVC repeat the measurement the value displayed at r033 must now be extremely low lt 2 Note A changeover to gearbox stage 2 is taken into account when computing the variable moment of inertia 7 2 4 Setting the Kp adaptation for the speed control Measure required The proportional gain of the speed controller should generally be adapted to the variable moment of inertia For a ratio of D max Dmin gt 3 to 4 it is absolutely necessary to optimize the kp adaptation in order to achieve good winding characteristics and fast commissioning Procedure Using the Set diameter and the Diameter setting value commands refer to Sheet 9a of the block diagram enter the diameter which Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN
176. has been set too high the winder can start to run and when unwinding using indirect tension control can result in slack in the material web 7 2 2 1 Friction characteristic closed loop speed controlled operation of the winder e g local operation and local inching forwards mode are selected The required inching setpoint is entered using H143 Local closed loop speed controlled operation is selected with H146 1 Procedure check the setpoint entered at d307 n ach read the torque setpoint at d331 the measurement result should be evaluated only after 10 20 seconds The torque setpoint is smoothed using H162 basic setting 0 5 s the pre control for inertia compensation is disabled with H227 0 0 and H228 0 0 pre settings measurement and reading out as in the following table H143 Input Setting H230 235 speed d807 e SS d307 read d331 H143 0 0 Select H230 so that the winder is just about to run or comes to a Pato ey at a low speed Then enter the value read at d331 into H230 H143 0 2 Enter the value read at d331 into H231 s s s s isdY the value read at d331 into H231 wa O at 91 ro 299 os TRS Enter the vave ead at d881 mamen Table7 4 Generating the friction characteristic Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 155 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Commissioning the winder after the points for the friction characteristic have been entered the calibration should be checked at variou
177. he speed correction control closed loop 4 reserved for expanded functionality 5 as for 3 tension controller output multiplied by V set TENSZ_07 T1945 X Lower limit web break detection Limit value for the web break detection For indirect tension control the torque actual value and for direct tension control the tension actual value is compared with this limit the web break signal is activated when this limit is fallen below TENSZ_07 T2015 X2 Delay web break signal Delay time before the web break signal is activated this is mainly used to suppress erroneous signals TENSZ_07 T2100 T Select winding hardness characteristic 0 winding hardness characteristic active 1 winding hardness characteristic inactive TENSZ_01 T1475 Start of adaptation tension controller Start of Kp adaptation for the tension controller TENSZ_01 T1770 A1 End of adaptation tension controller End of Kp adaptation for the tension controller TENSZ_01 T1770 A2 Value Unit Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Unit Type Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type 1000 ms 0 05 2 0 2 0 3000 ms 0 0 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H209 b d 8 H210 b d 9a H211 b d 9a H212
178. heet 3 Setpoint 3 from CB 15 Actual value 3 14 Control word 2 from CB Actual value 4 14 Bit1 0to1 15 15 17 22a Setpoint 5 from CB 15 Setpoint 6 from CB 15 Setpoint 5 from CB 15 s Setpoint 6 from CB 15 Empf_COM Receive data from CB 15 Enable H288 Actual value 5 14 Receive data Setpoint 5 from CB Setpoint 6 from CB 15 Parameter Parameter m lt J0 nO EG PNAME Parameter block Spm 1009 ERGO for technological parameters dxxx and Hxxx 4 Word No Empf_PEER Receive data via PTP sen E le H2 Send data nable H289 1 Parameter identification Significance 2 Inday l 1 Control word 1 16 17 22a 3 Parameter value in 4 bytes Setpoint 2 14 5 Status word 1 to CB Bits 1 0 to 1 15 15 Setpoint 3 14 Empf_BASE Receive data from CU Actual value 2 15 See hel Significance Actual value 3 15 ZOO r p2nmMA2Z O Cc Status word 2 to CB Bit 2 0 to 2 15 15 3 Refer to Sheet 3 Actual value 5 15 Actual value 6 15 d_COM Send data to CB Actual value 5 15 Send end dai Enable H288 Actual value 6 15 Actual value 5 15 Technology module T400 Actual value 6 15 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Overview serial interfaces Sheet 2 Source selections Control word 1 Speed controlled operation P100 4 l Send data ein Receive data 7400 to CU Speed acquisition P130 151 T400 from CU P
179. hnology module receives 8 words from the base drive the channels sequence and the contents are defined with appropriate parameters e g P734 for CUVC Status word 1 which is transferred is logically combined CU gt T400 with the status messages of the T400 and transferred to the automation Various status bits are evaluated in the configured software 14 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 T400 technology module Additional status words and actual values can be sent from the base drive to the T400 via the backplane bus for monitoring setpoint from the CU or for output CUVC CUMC CU D1 Explanation Par P734 01 U734 01 Status word 1 block diag 22 Word1 16ms P734 02 148 91 U734 02 Receive word 2 free d550 P734 03 0 U734 03 eS Receive word 3 free d551 P734 04 U734 04 Status word 2 not used Mod tae P734 05 165 U734 05 141 Torque setpoint Word5 2ms d552 P734 06 24 241 U734 06 142 Torque actual value 2ms d553 P734 07 0 U734 07 0 Receive word 7 free 2ms d554 P734 08 0 U734 08 0 Receive word 8 free d555 Table 2 2 Status word and actual value channel from the base drive to T400 2 1 2 Interface to COMBOARD b d 15 Communications Permanently set and freely selectable setpoints actual values can be via PROFIBUS DP transferred via the COMBOARD communications module in this case only CB1 or CBP ADB The T400 with the COMBOARD only has a P
180. iagram 4 Control technique Closed loop torque limiting control Closed loop speed correction control Closed loop constant v control An overview of the complete closed loop control structure is provided in Sheet 4 of the block diagram The closed loop tension control characteristic for the winder influences the speed controller in the converter in three different ways A specific winding technique is defined using parameter H203 For the closed loop torque limiting control the higher level tension controller acts on the speed controller limits and thus maintains the required web tension Compensating torques for friction and inertia compensation are generated as pre control values which are added in front of the torque limiting with the correct sign With this control method the speed controller is kept at the torque limits by entering a saturation setpoint Further the velocity setpoint is limited This means that the winder automatically goes to the saturation setpoint if the web breaks or the web sags When the closed loop speed correction control is selected a cascade type structure is obtained The tension controller influences the speed controller setpoint The compensation torques are added as supplementary torque setpoint after the speed controller in the base drive CU For the closed loop constant v control the tension controller is disabled output limiting 0 0 using parameter H195 and the winder operates
181. idual control word bits are assigned to fixed control commands the same is true for T400 terminals 53 to 60 block diagram 17 For these 8 fixed control signals refer to Table 2 8 it is possible to toggle between control via T400 terminals and input via a control word from the COMBOARD or the peer to peer link The control commands are selected via appropriate parameterization and BlCO technology or Service IBS program The digital inputs terminals 53 to 60 the appropriate bit of the possible control words and fixed values 0 and 1 are available as sources Control bits which are not included in the control words can be addressed as dedicated parameters All of the possible control commands for winders are combined for diagnostic purposes in 3 display parameters d332 d333 and d334 These parameters indicate the status of the control signals directly before internal processing 3 3 2 Winding direction Winding from above or below To change the direction of the motor rotation the Winding from below command can be activated block diagram 5 6 9b This reverses the polarity sign of the speed setpoint signal for all operating modes including reverse winding after the splice refer to Fig 3 2 This change also activates the override ramp function generator NE J W inding from above W inding from below Note Fig 3 2 Sketch of the winding direction The Winding from below command shou
182. ifferentiating H173 This value should not be exceeded Instability can result if the time constants are too high H173 Differentiating time constant Refer to Chapter 5 H174 Inhibit D controller 1 no D control H193 Min value speed dependent tension Refer to Chapter 5 controller limits Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 45 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description d319 Tension controller output from the PI comp Display parameter d346 Actual Kp adaptation Display parameter Table 3 15 Parameters for the tension controller 3 4 4 Generating the supplementary torque setpoint block diagram 6 9b Compensation In order to compensate for the friction losses and the torques when accelerating braking the appropriate compensation factors are calculated and are added to the torque setpoint with the correct polarity The winding direction web routing closed loop control type material thickness and width as well as the gearbox stage changeover are automatically taken into account This compensation influences the winder control in two different ways Pre control torque For closed loop speed correction control the pre control torque is injected as supplementary torque setpoint The speed setpoint is entered from T400 if H282 0 Torque limit For the closed loop torque limiting control the compensation additionally acts in addition to the torque controller output on the speed controller limits The drive converter p
183. ific source Default KRO310 actual diameter IF_PEER Istwert_W2 X Actual word W3 PtP Send word 3 from the peer to peer protocol must be connected with the application specific source Default KRO344 sum of the velocity setpoint IF_PEER Istwert_W3 X Setpoint W2 PtP Receive word 2 from the peer to peer protocol KR0018 can be connected with an application specific destination IF_PEER Sollwert_W2 Y Setpoint W3 PtP Receive word 3 from the peer to peer protocol KR0019 can be connected with an application specific destination IF_PEER Sollwert_W3 Y Input system start The system start control command is used to enable operation b d 18 for standard system operation This signal must remain active until the basic drive is shut down Otherwise the motor would coast down The input for the system start command must be connected to the application specific source Default B2003 digital input 1 terminal 53 1Q1Z_01 B10 1 Input tension controller on The input for the tension controller on command must be connected with the application specific source Default B2004 digital input 2 terminal 54 Alternatively e B2011 for digital input or splice B2004 amp splice enable s B2012 for PROFIBUS or splice splice enable amp B 2611 1Q1Z_01 B11 1 Value Type Value Type Value Type Type Type Value Type Value Type K4335 KR0310 R KR0344
184. ime Digital outputs The digital outputs are used for status signals as well as during start up and during winding refer to Table 2 10 Characteristics When the drive is first powered up all of the outputs are first inhibited high ohmic state In the initialization phase they are controlled with the values which are present at that time When the drive is shutdown or under a fault condition all of the outputs are connected to ground NOTE Logical 0 Output is open or connected to ground Logical 1 Output is closed i e the power supply voltage connected at the terminal 24V is present Freely inter The following table shows the pre assigned digital outputs of the T400 connectable technology module The digital outputs can be freely inter connected using BICO technology or Service IBS program Assignment binector Explanation 46 H521 Web break B2501 Web break detected 47 H522 Standstill V act 0 B2502 Speed actual value lt H157 48 H523 Tension controller on B2503 Tension pos controller on speed contr enabled 49 H524 Basedriveon B2504 Operating signal from the base drive 20 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 T400 technology module 52 H525 Speed setpoint 0 B2505 Speed controller setpoint lt 0 1 i 2 51 H526 Limit value monitor 1 B2114 Output can be parameterized H114 Table 2 10 Terminal assignment digital outpu
185. in Max Type KROO 00 R K4335 l K 4336 l KR0000 R KR0000 R KR0000 R KR0000 R 2 0 R 133 Parameters d452 b d 2 d453 b d 2 d454 b d 2 d455 b d 2 d456 b d 2 d457 b d 2 H495 b d 20 22a H496 b d 20 22a d497 b d 20 H499 b d 12 134 Setpoint W5 from CB Receive word 5 from the CB module can be connected with the application specific destination IF_COM Sollwert_W5 Y Setpoint W6 from CB Receive word 6 from the CB module can be connected with the application specific destination IF_COM Sollwert_W6 Y Setpoint W7 from CB Receive word 7 from the CB module can be connected with the application specific destination IF_COM Sollwert_W7 Y Setpoint W8 from CB Receive word 8 from the CB module can be connected with the application specific destination IF_COM Sollwert_W8 Y Setpoint W9 from CB Receive word 9 from the CB module can be connected with the application specific destination IF_COM Sollwert_W9 Y Setpoint W10 from CB Receive word 10 from the CB module can be connected with the application specific destination IF_COM Sollwert_W 10 Y Upper limit monitoring CB Maximum tolerance time before the start of telegram receive monitoring IF_COM Ueberwa LU Setting value monitoring CB H496 H246 max time tolerance for telegram failure default 80ms IF_COM Ueberwa SV Status display CB receive Status display
186. injury or property damage can result if T WARNING For the purpose of this User Manual and product labels Warning proper precautions are not taken CAUTION For the purpose of this User Manual and product labels Caution indicates that minor personal injury or material damage can result if proper precautions are not taken 6 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Warning information NOTE For the purpose of this User Manual Note indicates information about the product or the respective part of the User Manual which is essential to highlight CAUTION This board contains components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge Prior to touching any electronics board your body must he electrically discharged This can be simply done by touching a conductive grounded object immediately beforehand e g bare metal cabing t components socket protective conductor contact Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 7 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Overview 1 Overview 1 1 Validity SPW420 Note Base and interface modules This User Manual is valid for the standard Axial winder SPW420 software package Version 2 0 The configured software based on T300 MS320 version 1 3 has been expanded and has been implemented on the T400 technology module 32 bit Differences to the previous versions will be shown in Chapter 10 Version changes This SPW420 software can on
187. is controlled using closed loop torque limiting control refer to Chapter 4 12 The autonomous splice control is realized using a higher level PLC system and allows a flying roll change Shortly before the roll change the tension transducer should be changed over from roll 1 to roll 2 although roll 1 should move with the last torque As soon as the knife has been positioned at the cutting location roll 1 should be tensioned to a very high value for cutting This tension depends on the material weight per square meter g m Solution The following solution is implemented using the freely assignable blocks in SPW 420 refer to Fig 4 18 and block diagram 24 The last torque of roll 1 before the tension transducer change over is stored and is still used as long as the knife has still not reached the cutting position The tension transducer change signal activates the changeover from direct tension control to indirect one The winder operates with the saved torque A characteristic dependent on the weight per square meter g m is introduced in order to calculate the tension for cutting The changeover is made using the knife in cutting position command Char_1 End point Y2 h keristi characteristic os Loa W g m 2 N Receive word 6 from CB 15 3 Torque limit 6 3 Output UMS_2 at H610 and H611 6 4 nife in cutting position Control word 2 8 from CB J B0628 15 4 22a PS a 8 Control
188. is overcontrolled by entering into it a low negative saturation setpoint H145 H145 0 0 05 This causes the speed controller when material is present to go to its negative output limit If an attempt is made to re wind the material which has just been unwound the speed controller goes to the entered torque limit B due to the selected tension setpoint The tension setpoint therefore specifies the torque setpoint by appropriately controlling torque limit B braking in the clockwise direction of rotation The core function of the indirect tension control is that the torque is entered as tension setpoint multiplied by diameter D max diameter and max tension setpoint result in max torque In order that the entered torque results in the best approximation to the required material tension it is necessary to precisely compensate the friction and accelerating torque When the web breaks or the material web sags if the unwinder was to continue to rotate or even accelerate this could result in an uncontrolled material rejection This is prevented by the fact that the speed controller intervenes and approaches the saturation setpoint set using H145 The drive then rotates at a low speed in the wind direction and winds up residual material web which may be in the machine refer to Chapter 3 6 1 The material web is threaded in the standard system operation The velocity setpoint limiting function automatically ensures this
189. ixed setpoint 2 0 0 KR0815 gt Output of H815 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Control Logic and constant value Sheet 23b Enable Free_Block 0 Sampling time T1 2ms T5 128ms Sequence inT1orT5 3 Input quantity char_1 H804 453 KR0453 gt gt KR End point Y2 0 5 H803_ W g m 2 Receive word 6 from CB 15 3 Input 1 MUL_1 Characteristic Output char_1 H810 804 KR0804 gt KR Gap Input 2 MUL_1 L 75 3 H811 814 0 9 H814 KRO814 gt gt KR Fixed setpoint_1 Output MUL_1 Start point Y1 H802 1 0 Start point X1 End point X2 Input 1 UMS_1 H820 351 KR0351 gt KR Input 2 UMS_1 Input 1 UMS_2 Torque limit 6 3 H823 822 KR0822 gt KR H821 822 KR0822 gt KR Switch signal Output UMS_1 Input 2 UMS_2 H824 810 KR0810 gt gt KR KR0825 gt Output UMS_2 at H610 and H611 6 4 l H822 2628 Tension transducer change Control word 2 8 from CB 82628 E B 15 4 22a 7 Switch signal UMS_2 Knife in the cutting pos H825 2635 Contr word 2 15 from CBLB2635 B 15 4 22a 7 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 Example with free blocks Cut tension for splice SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Shee
190. l support H177 1 when required Generating the The winding hardness characteristic is realized as a parameterizable characteristic polygon characteristic with 5 points The actual diameter and the main tension setpoint after the ramp function generator are the input signals The source for the maximum tension reduction referred to the setpoint can be freely selected using H087 The tension setpoint starts to decrease if the diameter reaches the value set at H183 It follows the parameterized characteristic which is set using the parameters shown in the block diagram block diagram 7 The diameter values D and D1 D4 for parameters H183 to H187 must be set in an increasing sequence The tension reductions for diameters D1 D2 and D3 are specified using H180 H181 and H182 and more precisely as a value of the maximum tension reduction 30 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description Tension setpoint for D1 main setpoint maximum tension reduction Example 1 main setpoint H180 Example 2 With the standard link from H087 and HO86 0 60 H086 is parameterized as fixed value for the maximum tension reduction The main tension setpoint is 0 50 The winding hardness characteristic then has the following characteristics a If the diameter is less than or equal to the initial diameter for the start of tension reduction set in H183 then the output of the winding hardness characteris
191. ld only be activated if both modes are really operationally required Otherwise Winding from above should always be selected independent of the web path 3 3 3 Gearbox stage changeover block diagram 5 Several gearbox stages The configured software allows you to changeover to a second gearbox stage which has been expanded using BICO technology This is normally used in order to achieve a higher web tension with the same motor output but at a lower web velocity For instance this is required for thicker materials H042 is used to select the changeover signal and the Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 35 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description Formula for H127 Example ratio between the standard gearbox stage and gearbox stage 2 must be entered by selecting H138 or the fixed value of H127 Operation with gearbox stage 2 for the same motor speed means that the winder shaft rotates at a lower speed The influence of gearbox stage 2 on the velocity setpoint moment of inertia diameter computer and the inertia compensation as well as reverse winding after a splice is automatically taken into account by the winder software The friction torque characteristic can be adapted using parameter H229 source or H128 fixed value The influence of gearbox stage 2 on the velocity setpoint is effective in system operation local operation and reverse winding after a splice Standard gearhox ratio
192. lementary torque setpoint block diagram 6 9b sse ee 46 3 4 4 1 Compensation calculation block diagram 9b sese eee eee eese 46 3 9 Calculation oic a a aaa a aiai aaa 47 3 5 1 Diameter computer block diagram 9a sees errsrnssssrrnnsrnnnsssrrnnsns 47 3 5 2 Length measurement and length stop block diagram 13 nescence eee 50 3 6 Monitoring and Sig naling sese esse eee ee eee caaeeeeseaaeeessiaaeeeessaaaees 51 3 6 1 Web break detection block diagram 7 sss eee ceeneeeeteeeeeeeteeneeeeteeaes 51 3 6 2 Freely connectable limit value monitors block diagram 10 sese sese eee 53 3 6 3 Analog outputs block diagram 10 esse eee e nnns 53 3 6 4 Overspeed block diagram 20 sss sse eee tirrsstsssssiirnsstnnssstnnnsen ceaeeetee 54 3 6 5 gt EXCOSSIVE trU aa a aaa Z aa aka a aosda aaas 54 3 6 6 Stall protection inorena noana a a a Tad a eaat 55 3 6 7 Receiving telegrams from CU CB and PTP block diagram 20 sese eee 55 B27 e nT TTT 56 3 7 1 Free function blocks block diagram 23a 23b eee ceeteteeeetttaaeeees 56 3 7 2 Free display parameters block diagram 25 sse eee ceeeeeceeeseeteeeeee 57 4 Configuring instructions and CXAaMPes cccccceseeeeeeeeeees vese cesse eesss ses 58 4 1 Some formulas for a Winder drive sss sese e ceteeeeeeeeaees 58 4 2 Calculating the inertia compensation sse eee eee eee eee e deeeeeenees 62 4 2 1 Determining parameter H228 for the fixed moment of inertia sese eee 62 4 2 2 Determining parameter H227 for the variable
193. lution of the winder at D min and Vmax H218 Select mode web tachometer 2 Refer to Chapter 5 computation is inhibited Diameter of the mandrel as a of D max H277 Enable diameter calculation without V Refer to Chapter 5 signal H278 Setting pulse duration Refer to Chapter 5 Table 3 17 Parameters to compute the diameter Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 49 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description 3 5 2 Length measurement and length stop block diagram 13 Principle The length measurement function is based on the availability of a digital pulse encoder at the web tachometer input refer to Fig 2 2 Increm_2 This can either be an actual web tachometer or the signal of a pulse tachometer of the master machine drive A position actual value is available after H218 operating mode and H213 pulse number and H215 rated speed have been entered However this must be adapted at the specified normalization H239 H240 In this case the nominal length Ln length where a_ position measurement of 100 is determined of the particular arrangement is calculated according to the following equation Ln HD 32 767 65 536 1685 58 Dy Ds roll diameter in mm 4 or ier EERE gearbox factor N monro P pulse number pulse encoder The normalization length 75 km is now divided by the rated length If the result is in the range of up to approx 190 this value is entered into parameter H239 If the ratio lies ab
194. ly run on the T400 technology module both in the drive converter as well as in the SRT400 subrack The control core all of the functions of the standard SPW 420 software package are essentially also available to other SIMADYN D modules PM4 PM6 and FM 458 This standard software package has been released for the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES drive converters and the SIMOREG DC MASTER drive converters with the following base and interface modules Base modules CU s CUVC or CUMC installed in the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES VC or MC converters as well as the earlier CU2 or CU3 modules installed in SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES VC or SC e SIMOREG DC MASTER Interface modules CB Only the subsequently described slots and combinations have been released e PROFIBUS interface module CBP on the ADB carrier module lower slot of the ADB installed in slot 3 of the Electronics box if a CUVC or CUMC are used e PROFIBUS interface module CB1 at slot 3 if either CU2 or CU3 is used e Peer to peer USS interface module SCB1 or SCB2 at slot 3 1 2 General overview The digital SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES and SIMOREG DC MASTER converters can be expanded by the T400 technology module and various interface modules Standard software packages are available for applications which are frequently used e g angular synchronism sheet cutters or axial winder controls closed loop If the technological Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO E
195. m T400 IF_COM send_ZW1 X Status word 2 at CB Send word 4 at the CB module must be connected with the application specific source Default K4336 status word 2 from T400 IF_COM send_ZW2 X Actual value W7 at CB Send word 7 at the CB module must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant output real type Y 0 0 IF_COM Istwert_W7 X Actual value W8 at CB Send word 8 at the CB module must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant output real type Y 0 0 IF_COM Istwert_W8 X Actual value W9 at CB Send word 9 at the CB module must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant output real type Y 0 0 IF_COM Istwert_W9 X Actual value W10 at CB Send word 10 at the CB module must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant output real type Y 0 0 IF_COM Istwert_W 10 X Setpoint W2 from CB Receive word 2 from the CB module can be connected with the application specific destination IF_COM Sollwert_W2 Y Setpoint W3 from CB Receive word 3 from the CB module can be connected with the application specific destination IF_COM Sollwert_W3 Y Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Min Type M
196. meterization only if the speed controller is operational on the T400 i e H282 1 SREFZ_07 NC035 B2 Slave drive Disables the central ramp function generator for the velocity setpoint if the winder operates as a slave drive and the setpoint is already available as ramp function generator output 0 ramp function generator effective 1 ramp function generator not effective SREFZ_01 S47 1 Smoothing web velocity setpoint Smoothes the setpoint if the ramp function generator is switched through with H154 1 SREFZ_01 S10 T Limit value for standstill identification Threshold for the standstill identification 25 of the threshold is used as hysteresis The speed or velocity actual value are used for the signal depending on H146 SREFZ_07 S810 X Delay standstill identification Delay time for the standstill signal SREFZ_07 S840 T Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Type Value Unit Type Value Min Max Type Value Unit Type 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 ms 0 01 111 Parameters H160 b d 4 H161 b d 5 H162 b d 6a H163 b d 12 H164 b d 5 H165 b d 13 H166 b d 5 H167 b d 9b H168 b d 9b 112 Erase EEROM A positive edge at H160 deletes the EEPROM and therefore re establi
197. meterizing the web break detection and evaluating the web break signal refer to Chapter 3 6 1 The tension setpoint is controlled via the winding hardness characteristic H206 0 This allows a reduced tension to be set for an increasing diameter The characteristic output is the setpoint input for the tension controller and the tension pre control The tension and torque setpoints can be adjusted for pre control using H200 The tension controller compares the tension actual value under certain circumstances smoothed using a filter with the tension setpoint and outputs an appropriate correction signal The tension controller output signal and the parameterized pre control value are added and after been multiplied by the actual diameter is Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 83 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples lt 15 gt lt 16 gt Threading the material web Torque characteristic 84 used to limit the speed controller output max diameter and max tension setpoint results in the max torque The tension controller output is limited via H195 typical value 0 1 The compensation torque comprises the friction torque and accelerating torque and must be additionally overcome Therefore it is input and added to the tension torque When the material web is threaded it is possible that the drive automatically changes over from closed loop speed to closed loop tension control
198. n accelerating e g for CUVC via r033 P032 01 155 The average value of R033 is generated in the interval between 0 1 and 0 9 of the specified speed setpoint the winder is then operated without material web with respect to the remaining machine gearbox stage 1 is always used 7 2 3 1 Constant moment of inertia H228 Principle Procedure 156 We recommend that the fixed moment of inertia is calculated according to Chapter 4 2 1 Determine H228 by accelerating along a defined ramp disable the variable moment of inertia with H227 0 0 insert the mandrel with core set the core diameter and check at d310 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Commissioning the winder enter a setpoint with H068 and activate the OFF1 and System start commands read out r033 for CUVC P032 01 155 in the range from 10 90 of the speed setpoint enter the monitored average value of r33 multiplied by D core Dmax in parameter H228 Or parameter H228 is adjusted until the component of the speed control r033 for CUVC goes to 0 repeat the measurement the value displayed at r033 must now be extremely low lt 2 Note Different values at d331 for ramp up and ramp down signify that the friction component has not been precisely compensated 7 2 3 2 Variable moment of inertia H227 Principle Also here we recommend that parameter H227 is first calculated corresponding to C
199. n acceleration along a 20 sec ramp at the maximum diameter and maximum web width the inertia compensation generates a torque of 2 36 4 3 Selecting the winding ratio winding range Winding operation is discussed in the following The same is essentially true for unwinding The winding ratio is the following quotient Max Wickeldurchmesser D max Durchmesser des Wickelkerns Dern diameter of the winder core Dkern Dcore max winding diameter The useful wound quantity as a is given by equation 14 T LD max Dau ana 4 For a winding ratio of 6 1 the useful winding length is z 97 4 4 Power and torque The power required for winding is constant over the complete winding range if at the selected web velocity the set winding tension is to be kept constant also refer to equation 4 Winding power P w Z b d V b lt working width in mm d working thickness in mm V web velocity in m min Z specific material tension in N mm material cross section The required torque increases linearly with the diameter of the winder roll 4 5 Defining the sign These definitions are valid independent of the mode as either winder or unwinder 66 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples The values for the tension setpoint and the tension actual value must have a positive polarity sign The remaining polarities signs are then
200. n actual value lt tension setpoint Dancer roll at the center Unwinder is running with V get tension setpoint tension actual value 4 6 Selecting the closed loop control concept Closed loop control concept H203 The standard SPW420 axial winder software package allows the following closed loop control concepts to be implemented e Indirect closed loop tension control without tension transducer e Direct closed loop tension control with dancer roll or tension transducer e Closed loop constant v control if there is no nip position These control concepts will now be explained Chapters 4 7 to 4 13 will describe individual examples of concepts which are used Parameter H203 is used to changeover between the various control concepts 4 6 1 Indirect closed loop tension control Open loop tension control Concept H203 0 68 This technique does not require a tension transducer or tension measuring device The tension controller is not used but instead the tension setpoint is multiplied by the diameter and the result is directly pre controlled as torque setpoint so that the motor current linearly increases with increasing diameter and the tension is kept constant For this control type the speed controller is kept at its limit by entering an Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Note Caution Configuring instructions and examples saturation setpoint refer to the con
201. n example for a winder with tension transducer and closed loop torque limiting control is shown in Fig 4 12 Tension setpoint and web velocity setpoint Machine velocity are entered at terminals 90 91 and 92 93 as analog signals A pulse encoder as shaft tachometer is used for speed actual value sensing this is connected at the basic drive The diameter computer continuously computes the diameter according to the following formula web velocit diameter T speed A speed setpoint is entered into the speed controller which corresponds to the actual web velocity plus the saturation setpoint H145 set H145 to approx 0 05 0 1 The saturation setpoint means that the speed controller when web material is present goes into saturation i e up to its positive output limit When an attempt is made to increase the speed by the saturation setpoint the speed controller output goes to the entered torque limit that results from the tension setpoint The tension actual value is available as analog signal at terminals 94 99 In this case under certain circumstances external smoothing may be required refer to Fig 4 12 If the web breaks or the web sags the speed controller intervenes and the prevents the winder drive from further accelerating by controlling the circumferential velocity to the sum of the web velocity and the saturation setpoint overspeed protection The drive can also be shutdown by appropriately para
202. n generator ms Tann SSCS ET SSS ms Tarare ang T m Rounding atfatrampdown SSCS H138 Source ratio gearbox stage 2 Ratio of the gearbox stages between stage 1 and stage 2asa H139 Normalization web velocity Refer to Table 3 1 H154 Slave drive Disables the central ramp function generator for the velocity setpoint if the winder operates as a slave drive H155 Smoothing web velocity setpoint Setpoint smoothing if the ramp function generator is switched through with H154 1 d301 Effective web velocity setpoint Display parameter d340 Compensated web velocity Display parameter d344 Velocity setpoint Display parameter Table 3 3 Parameters for the velocity setpoint for winder operation 3 1 2 4 Velocity setpoint for local operation The standard axial winder software package has in the local operating mode its own setpoints system with a separate override ramp function generator Depending on the selected local operating mode the corresponding setpoint is switched through The override ramp function generator is in this case always effective after an operating mode change block diagram 18 The ramp up and ramp down times are set together using H161 The presently active setpoint can be monitored using d344 It is possible to toggle between closed loop speed velocity control and local operation using H146 0 1 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 27 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description Local operating
203. n reference value is entered as fixed value via parameter H082 with the standard connection from H083 generally the voltage is set at the dancer roll center position For H177 1 the tension setpoint channel is interrupted and the winding hardness characteristic can then be used to control open loop the dancer roll support The tension controller operates as dancer roll position controller and normally generates a supplementary velocity setpoint which is input into the speed controller with a negative polarity This means that the dancer roll actual value tracks the entered position reference value The D controller is used to dampen the dancer roll and this prevents oscillation between the dancer roll and winder the following parameters should be set H174 0 H196 1 and H283 0 The speed setpoint is obtained from the total velocity setpoint divided by the diameter Generally the position controller output has a relatively low effect of approx 0 02 0 1 on the speed controller The tension controller output can be limited using H195 the influence on the velocity setpoint can be normalized using H141 When the web breaks the dancer roll falls to its lower end stop and the position controller goes to its output limit as it can no longer maintain the reference position This means that the speed increases by the value set at H195 The drive can be shutdown by appropriately parameterizing the web break detection and evalu
204. ncer roll can be connected two pulse encoders can be connected to measure the motor speed and web velocity surface tachometer can be connected to sense the diameter actual value Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 T400 technology module 2 T400 technology module 2 1 Communication interfaces All of the T400 interfaces included in the standard software package are shown in Fig 2 1 R Communications interface PROFIBUS peer to peer USS BUS and PC start up interface RB Base drive or converter R O interface Analog and digital inouts outputs R Actual value sensing Two incremental encoders The closed loop control core of the axial winder and the actual value sensing is executed on the T400 Its functions are explained in detail in Chapter 3 All of the interfaces shown in Fig 2 1 which are used to transfer process and parameter data with the T400 are described in the following Chapters Communications interface Basic drive Control core VO interface Actual value sensing Fig 2 1 Communications interface for T400 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 13 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 T400 technology module 2 1 1 Interface to the base drive converter b d 15a Communications Fast process data and parameter transfer as well as faults alarms with CU between the T400 technology module and the base drive is realized using the backplane bus via a parallel dual
205. ndard stop can be directly initiated via a digital output or signaled to the automation via the status word The length stop signal is canceled if the machine is moving at less than 4 of the rated velocity or the drive is powered down Notes e The braking distance is continuously computed and displayed However it is only precise if the drive is operated with v const When accelerating the value is too low when decelerating too high The error depends on the ratio T T e The length actual value can be up to 150 km in this case the resolution is 0 000024 of 75 km or approx 0 018 m The same scaling is also true for the braking distance H213 Pulse number web tachometer Pulse number per revolution from the web tachometer H215 Rated speed web tachometer Maximum speed of the measuring roll 100 at the maximum web velocity H218 Operating mode web tachometer Operating mode web tachometer encoder 2 H239 Adaptation divisor length computer Normalization web length computer refer above H240 Adaptation factor length computer Normalization web length computer refer above distance computer Table 3 18 Parameters to calculate the length and braking distance 3 6 Monitoring and signaling 3 6 1 Web break detection block diagram 7 The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for the identification to Concept respond The web break detection must be enabled H285 1 Closed loop tension control
206. nder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 21 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 T400 technology module 2 2 3 Pulse encoders Pulse encoder type Encoder power supply Screening 15 V power supply units Encoder pulse numbers 22 Pulse encoders with two tracks shifted through 90 degrees must be connected 15 V max 100 mA must be available from the T400 module as encoder power supply Encoders with a 15 24 V supply voltage especially 1XP8001 1 SIEMENS pulse encoders for 1LA5 motors frame sizes 100K to 200L The pulse encoder cable must be screened The cable screen should be connected to ground through the lowest impedance if possible using cable clamps This must be especially observed if these signal cables are routed close to proximity switches or switches with moving contacts If the 100 mA of the internal 15 V power supply is not sufficient then the following 15V power supply units are recommended e Type CM62 PS 220 AC 15 DC 1 220 V AC to 15V DC 1 A load capability Manufacturer Phoenix e Type FMP 15S 500 fast mounting 110 220 V AC to 15V DC 0 5 A load capability Manufacturer Block When selecting the encoder pulse number the maximum pulse frequency is 1 5 MHz Pulse encoders 1 2 from the axle web tachometer are connected directly to the CU T400 The T400 can use the shaft tachometer signals from the base drive CU via the backplane bus The mode can be parameterized using parameters H217 and H218
207. nector can then be monitored using an operator control device e g OP1S or PMU Display parameters Data type No available R type for KRxxxx 4 B type for Bxxxx 2 type for Kxxxx 1 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 57 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples 4 Configuring instructions and examples 4 1 Some formulas for a winder drive 1 2 3 58 Gearbox i n1 n2 Fig 4 1 Structure of an axial winder Winding ratio mm mm 1000 V m min D Il mm Winding torque referred to the motor shaft Nm IN mm Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples Winding power kW 4 Nm min 1 5 Gearbox ratio max motor speed max winder speed II Deore Nmax mm min 1000 Vmax m min 6 Moment of inertia solid cylinder kg m 7 mm kg mm dm 7 Moment of inertia hollow cylinder kg m m 4 4 I 4 4 A e J 8 10 IS S y 32 107 ee ee 8 Reduction of the moment of inertia through a gearbox 9 Fixed moment of inertia kg m 7 as a result of the winder components whose parameters do not change motor gearbox and winder core referred to the motor shaft J core Je J motor J gear o 10 Variable moment of inertia kg m 7 I b p mm kg mm Jv 32 10 l l dm Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 59
208. ng time Monitoring The telegram data transfer can be monitored during communications telegram receive The time limits after power on and during operation can be set separately H246 H247 The fault and alarm messages are transferred to the CU and displayed on the PMU if a data suppression mask H011 H012 has not been activated refer to Chapter 8 2 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 17 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 T400 technology module 2 1 4 USS slave interface b d 14a Communications The serial interface X01 RS232 RS485 can be alternatively used for via USS parameterization This is provided for the special case where the T400 is used in the SRT400 In this case the following settings are required ae E H600 Enable USS slave 1 H601 USS data transfer cable 0 RS485 OP1S 1 RS232 SIMOVIS OFF 1 8 Changeover from online operation CFC simple start up to on T400 USS ON USS OFF Online operation Table 2 7 Settings for USS slave operation Caution It is not possible to simultaneously use USS and be in online mode USS operation is not possible if the parameterization is incorrect This means the error can only be removed if you re select online operation and for example rectify the error using the Service IBS tool Operation with OP1S is only possible from version 2 2 2 1 5 Interface to the monitor An operator control program based on the SIMADYN D monitor CFC online and Service IBS can
209. nitialize after the change 0 German IF_CU DRIVE PLA ID standard software package The value is 420 for the standard software package on T400 for axial winder SPW420 PARAMZ_01 MODTYP Y Software version axial winder PARAMZ_01 VER Y Overtorque limit positive Upper torque actual value limit as a of the rated torque fault signal and shutdown at lact gt H003 Prerequisite The fault is not suppressed CONTZ_01 SU040 LU Overtorque limit negative Lower torque actual value limit as a of the rated torque fault signal and shutdown at lact lt H004 Prerequisite The fault is not suppressed CONTZ_01 SU040 LL Initialization time for CU couplings Delay after the T400 has been powered up voltage on or reset and before the coupling monitoring functions to the CU interface are activated CONTZ_01 SU130 T Stall protection threshold Nact Absolute speed actual value which must be exceeded for the stall protection fault message Condition 1 for the stall protection message n act lt H007 Prerequisite The fault is not suppressed CONTZ_01 SU080 L Stall protection threshold lact Absolute torque actual value which must be exceeded for the stall protection fault message Condition 2 for the stall protection message IM act gt H008 Prerequisite The fault is not suppressed CONTZ_01 SU090 L Data Value 0 Type Value 420 Type Value 2 0 Type R Value 1 2 Min 0 0
210. nitor 1 IF_CU BinOut I6 Control word 2 11 at CU Control word 2 11 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 112 Control word 2 12 at CU Control word 2 12 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 113 Control word 2 13 at CU Control word 2 13 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 114 Control word 2 14 at CU Control word 2 14 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 115 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type B2502 B2503 B2504 B2505 B2114 B2000 B2000 B2000 B2000 137 Parameters H535 b d 15a H537 b d 13a H538 b d 13a H539 b d 13a H540 b d 13a d549 b d 15a d550 b d 15a d551 b d 15a d552 b d 15a 138 Control word 2 15 at CU Value B2000 Control word 2 15 at CU can be connected with the application specific source Type B Default B2000 constant digital output IF_CU Steuerwort_2 116 Select digital inp
211. nnected to the application specific source Default KR0000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI BST INT SV Set INT The set input for the integrator can be connected to the application specific source Default B2000 constant B_output Y 0 0 FREI BST INT Input LIM The input for the limiter can be connected to the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y 0 0 EBREL BST UM X Upper limit value LIM The upper limit value for the limiter can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI BST UM LU Lower limit value LIM The lower limit value for the limiter can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO000 constant R_output Y 0 0 FREI_BST LIM LL Input EinV The input for the switch on delay stage can be connected with the application specific source Default B2000 constant B_output Y 0 FREI_BST EinV I Delay time EinV Pulse delay time for the switch on delay stage FREI_BST EinV T Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Parameters Value Type Value Type Value Type Unit Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Unit 0 0 0 0 ms KR0 000 R B2000 KR0000 R KR0 000 R KR0 000 R B2000 ms 145 Parameters H862
212. not constant due to the changing roll diameter as the material is wound and it therefore consists of two components a Fixed moment of inertia J p parameter H228 as a result of the winder components components which do not change b Variable moment of inertia J y adapted using parameter H227 as a result of the wound material This Chapter includes instructions as to how parameters H228 for the fixed moment of inertia and H227 for the variable moment of inertia can be calculated from the system data The equations involve normalized value quantities The formula characters in the equations and dimensions are listed in Chapter 4 1 4 2 1 Determining parameter H228 for the fixed moment of inertia Fixed moment of inertia The fixed moment of inertia comprises the sum of the following moments of inertia refer to Fig 4 2 s Moment of inertia of the motor s Moment of inertia of the gearbox referred to the motor shaft s Moment of inertia of the winder core also referred to the motor shaft e Remaining moments of inertia as a result of couplings tachometers etc W inder core or mandrel 62 Coupling Coupling Fig 4 2 Coupling between the motor and winder core Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples The following formula is valid for the fixed moment of inertia refer to Equation 9 JKern JF JMotor JGetr i2 The moments of inertia
213. nputs lt 24V DC N Communic ations module e g CB1 ADB 86 J Track A 4 J Track B 88 0 pulse 90 7 AY b gt Hov 91 OO 924 HOV D 93 gt A 94 B H10V iai Y cy D A o T PA A H Y Bee D 99 J F M ef i 34 46 P24 external e Q w 47 2 P H 48 SS gt Hi 49 ae L La pH L Lal EZE R fa H 55 el 61 u Tiv 4 56 57 58 P 59 d 60 2 2 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Le Increm_1 Fet block X01 Increm_2 Hardware addresses of the basic configured software Ana In_1 Ana In 2 Ana_Out_1 Ana ln 2 Ana_Out_2 Ana_In_4 Ana ln B BinInOut bi directional SSI_1 block SSI_2 BinInput X02 block Zero pulse from CUx converter CUx J Fot o Fet 9 Layout of the terminals of T400 technology module RS485 2 wire Re T Rx 70 Le T Rx Serial interface 1 Program download TTL TxD 68 CFC test mode start up RxD laz USS SIMOVIS RS23
214. oe S KR0321 gt Analog input 2 TA 2ms H103 329 Teminal 97 ane i KR0329 gt KR Terminal 99 B K Z Torque setpoint 6a 8 Terminal 94 A Terminal 99 KR0322 gt Analog input 3 TA 2ms Tension act value smoothed 12 2 Analog ground I Smoothin Analog ground Offset g Offset Adaptation Analog output 2 l E gt C S 2 KR0323 gt Analog input 4 TA 2ms H098 310 Terminal 98 j KR0310 gt VKR Terminal 99 Actual diameter 9a 8 Terminal 96 A i N Terminal 99 KR0322 gt Analog input 5 TA 2ms Pressure act value from the dancer roll 13 3 c Limit value monitor 1 d Limit value monitor 2 Input value GWM 1 l Input value GWM 2 Tension threshold 21 1 U H107 307 01051911 ranz N KR 0 signal for s o Output GWM 1 S ST Output GWM 2 H114 2403 x H122 2407 E B2407_ B Interval limit L 0 0 J B2408 Hysteresis H 0 0 Adaptation i l c B2411_ U A Comparison value GWM 1 Comparison value GWM 2 i H108 303 1H116 304 KR Length stop 13 8 l KR i i F Limit value x Limit value monitor 1 Tae 2 13a 5 22 6 a Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Analog inputs outputs limit value monitors 1 and 2 Sheet 10 Velocity setpoint 5 1 H069 68 Fixed value 0 0 _H068 KR0068 gt KR Web velocity compensation 5 1 H071 70 Fixed value 0 0 _H070 KR0070 gt KR
215. of the motor and gearbox can generally be taken from the rating plates or data sheets The moment of inertia of the winder core must be calculated If cardboard cores are used their moments of inertia can be neglected The higher the gearbox ratio i the lower is the influence of the winder core and the variable moment of inertia on the total moment of inertia The remaining moments of inertia are generally low with respect to the other moments of inertia and can be neglected Determining H228 We recommend that you determine the value of H228 in two steps 1 Calculate the percentage accelerating torque M pr as a result of the fixed moment of inertia J p and the accelerating time t p Prerequisite D Deore and tp th Je ny i 2 865 D oore Pry Formula characters and dimension Refer to Sect 4 1 1 2 This equation is obtained by dividing formulas 11 and 13 it calculates the accelerating torque referred to the rated torque as a 2 Determining the setting value for parameter H228 Formula characters and dimensions Refer to Sect 1 3 The value of H220 should be the shortest ramp available e g if inertia compensation is required for a fast stop The equation is valid for an internal dv dt calculation H226 0 and H225 1 0 Example Drive system data s fixed moment of inertia Jr 38 77 kg m rated motor spee d Nn 400 RPM gearbox ratio N mot Nwinder shatt i 5 8 Axial winder
216. ol Normalization factor for the influence of the web velocity setpoint by the tension control for closed loop speed correction control H203 3 5 SREFZ_01 S200 X2 Setpoint local crawl Setpoint for the local crawl operating mode SREFZ_01 S300 X2 Setpoint local inching forwards Setpoint for the local inching backwards operating mode SREFZ_01 S310 X2 Setpoint local inching backwards Setpoint for the local inching backwards operating mode SREFZ_01 S320 X2 Saturation setpoint Supplementary setpoint for the velocity setpoint for the closed loop torque limiting control to take the speed controller to its limit saturation Only set H145 for the closed loop torque limiting control H203 0 1 2 SREFZ_01 S360 X Closed loop speed control for local operation 0 velocity controlled local operation T speed controlled local operation SREFZ_01 NC112 12 Torque limit for closed loop speed control Enters the limits for the speed controller in local operation and for closed loop speed correction control SREFZ_07 C56 X Time for reverse winding after a splice This is the time which the drive should wind in reverse after the splice to take up material web CONTZ_07 SL70 T Speed setpoint reverse winding after the splice The setpoint to establish the web after the splice with negative polarity sign SREFZ_07 RW100 X Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max
217. olled winders a web tachometer is always required for the diameter computation An example for a winder with closed loop constant v control is shown in Fig 4 17 The tension controller has no effect and its input is disabled with H195 0 0 For H203 3 the closed loop speed correction control is selected as control type and the correction setpoint is now 0 0 For the diameter computer instead of the velocity setpoint the web velocity actual value from the web tachometer is used The closed loop tension control must be enabled in order to enable the diameter computer The diameter is calculated from the measured web velocity actual value and the speed actual value of the shaft tachometer The quotient of the velocity setpoint and the actual diameter then provides the speed setpoint for the winder The friction and acceleration compensation are entered as supplementary torque setpoint after the speed controller A pulse encoder should always be used as web tachometer When the web breaks the web tachometer signal goes to zero In accordance with the ramp up ramp down time parameterized using H238 the diameter goes toward Dmin and the winder speed increases For H236 1 the diameter for winders only increases i e when the web breaks the winder would continue to run at the same speed Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 89 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples Tachometer _ tt OM l
218. ometers functions Their outputs can be used everywhere as setpoints Motorized Motorized potentiometer 1 can be additionally parameterized as ramp potentiometer 1 as function generator to generate defined ramps during start up e g for additional ramp inertia compensation The ramp function generator mode is enabled with function generator 267 1 the setpoint is parameterized with H268 and the ramp up ramp down time with H269 The ramp function generator ramps up to H267 1 the entered setpoint with the Raise motorized potentiometer 1 command H030 with Lower motorized potentiometer 1 H032 it is ramped down towards 0 0 Motorized For the motorized potentiometer function the appropriate output can be potentiometer changed with the raise or lower control inputs It the commands are function briefly activated lt 300ms the output is changed bitwise When it is actuated for a longer period of time it changes with the ramp up ramp down times parameterized with H265 for motorized potentiometer 1 and with H263 for motorized potentiometer 2 If the control commands are present for longer than 4 s the ramp up ramp down ramps are changed over to H266 Mop 1 and H264 Mop 2 The outputs of the motorized potentiometers are available as monitoring visualization parameters d305 and d306 Param Parametername Explanation H032 Source lower motorized potentiometer 1 Command lower motorized potentiometer 1 H263 Motorized
219. ompensated onan L eee renee Adaptation 1 0 CHET R velocity without gearbox 9a 1 actual saturation gt KR0341 ee TE Lu setpoint 5 8 tension contronller on 17 8 Control technique LLL H203 0 1 8 6 Velocity setpoint 11 3 Setpoint local stop 0 0 11 5 Setpoint local operation V Correction Setpoint local crawl 0 10 H142 9a 1 Setp local inching forwards 0 05 H143 Setp local inching backwards 0 05 _H144 Setpoint positioning 12 8 o H166 1 allows a local setpoint to be added in the system 1 0L Hat a influnece tension control Output tension control 8 8 KR0313 Winder 16 8 Winding from Supplementary below 16 4 velocity setpoint 11 3 Input supplementa p oP ry Setpoint selection accordin setpoint 17 8 Velocity actual to the operating mode 18 lue 6 5 Actual Speed actual value va diameter 9a 8 smoothed 13 6 K poar Core diameter 9a 3 Local operator control 17 8 0 H146 Speed control for local operation Saturation setpoint KRO341 gt Actual Smoothing saturation setpoint i saturation Tension control setpoint 8 ms on 8 2 B2503 Current limiting control H203 0 1 2 Lasa Velocity setpoint Ramp up ramp down time 20000 ms aay Override ramp function generator only effective once for an operating mode change or I for operation enable or for winding from below Winding from below 16 4 Operato
220. on ee ee Dancerrollatthe bottom Fig 7 2 Dancer roll position for dancer roll position controls 7 2 6 Setting the tension controller Kp adaptation Required for Adaptation to the variable moment of inertia is required for torque H203 1 2 limiting controls with direct tension measurement operating modes H203 1 2 The indirect tension control H203 0 requires no adaptation and no tension controller setting For the speed correction control H203 3 5 it is not permissible that the adaptation is set in this case the Kp value from H197 is valid for the complete range 160 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Commissioning the winder Not When parameterizing the Kp characteristic essentially proceed as SIE described in Chapter 7 2 4 Optimizing the Then tension controller is optimized using the usual technique e g by tension controller entering a small supplementary tension setpoint and monitoring the speed actual value A damped oscillation must always be observed When entering a step function of a setpoint for other quantities e g the speed setpoint the same results must be obtained Optimization should be carried out for various diameters Experience values for the controller setting Kp for the speed correction control 0 1 0 3 Kp for torque limiting control and Dmin 0 1 0 3 Tn for torque limiting control 0 5 1 S Note For speed correction control the tension
221. ove then H239 is left at 100 and the inverse value is generated L 75 km This then lies below 50 and is entered into H240 75 km H239 7 100 H240 100 if H239 lt 190 L L otherwise H240 mm 100 ho 9 75 km H239 100 The length actual value is an absolute value with units m and can be monitored at parameter d309 Calculating the The braking distance still has to be calculated for the length stop This is braking distance the material length which still runs through the machine for a standard stop until the machine comes to a standstill This is determined from the machine ramp function generator data The maximum velocity H244 as well as the ramp down time from the maximum velocity Tr H241 and the rounding off time at ramp down Tvr H242 must be entered The calculation is based on constant velocity operation and a linear deceleration ramp for a standard stop The braking distance can be precisely calculated refer to Fig 3 5 Fig 3 5 Principle of the braking distance calculation 50 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description The braking distance can be monitored at d350 It is added to the already traveled length actual value and is compared with the length setpoint reference value selected using H262 If the value is exceeded the length stop signal binector 411 becomes active which can be connected to the limit value monitors The sta
222. peration In every local mode this signal must remain active until the basic drive is shut down Otherwise the motor would coast down The input for the local operator control command must be connected to the application specific source Default B2009 digital input 7 terminal 59 Alternatively e B2624 for PROFIBUS control word 2 bit 4 1Q1Z_01 B16 1 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value B2005 Type B Value B2006 Type B Value B2007 Type B Value B2008 Type B Value B2009 Type B 97 Parameters H028 b d 17 H029 b d 16 H030 b d 16 H031 b d 16 H032 b d 16 H033 b d 16 H034 b d 16 98 Input local stop Value The input for the local stop command must be connected to the application specific Type source Default B2010 digital input 8 terminal 60 Alternatively e B2625 for PROFIBUS control word 2 5 1Q1Z_01 B17 1 Input raise motorized potentiometer 2 Value The input for the raise motorized potentiometer 2 command must be connected with Type the application specific source Default B2622 control word 2 2 from CB 1Q1Z_01 B20 1 Input raise motorized potentiometer 1 Value The input for the raise motorized potentiometer 1 command must be connected with Type the application specific source Default B2630 control word 2 10 from CB 1Q1Z_01 B40 1 Input lower motorized potentiometer
223. point local operation Enters a fixed value as technology parameter 1Q1Z_01 Al230A X Input setpoint local operation The input for the setpoint in local operation must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0074 output from H074 fixed value 1Q1Z_01 A1230 X Fixed value external dv dt Enters a fixed value as technology parameter 1Q1Z_01 Al240A X Input external dv dt Input for the external acceleration value must be connected with the application specific source Default KR0076 output from H076 fixed value 1Q1Z_01 Al240 X Fixed value web width Enters a fixed value as technology parameter 1Q1Z_01 Al250A X Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Min Max Type KRO068 R 0 0 2 0 2 0 R KR0070 R 0 0 2 0 2 0 R KR0072 R 0 0 2 0 2 0 R KR0074 R 0 0 2 0 2 0 R KR0076 R 1 0 2 0 2 0 103 Parameters H079 Input web width Value KR0078 The input for the web width must be connected with the application specific source Type R Default KR0078 output from H078 fixed value b d 11 1Q1Z_01 Al250 X H080 Fixed value tension setpoint Value 0 0 Enters a fixed value as
224. r Input to reset the web length computer must be connected with the application specific source Default B2632 control word 2 12 from CB 1Q1Z_07 B206 Adaptation analog input 1 Adaptation factor for analog input 1 terminals 90 91 input range 10V corresponds to 1 0 IF_CU AI0A X1 Offset analog input 1 Offset for analog input 1 terminals 90 91 the offset is added after the adaptation IF_CU AI10 OFF Adaptation analog input 2 Adaptation factor for analog input 2 terminals 92 93 input range 10V corresponds to 1 0 IF_CU AI25A X1 Offset analog input 2 Offset for analog input 2 terminals 92 93 the offset is added after adaptation IF_CU AI25 OFF Adaptation analog input 3 Adaptation factor for analog input 3 terminals 94 99 input range 10V corresponds to 1 0 IF_CU AI40A X1 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type B2606 B B2613 B B2626 B B2632 B 2 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 101 Parameters H059 b d 10 H060 b d 10 H061 b d 10 H062 b d 10 H063 b d 10 H064 b d 2 14 H065 b d 2 14 d066 b d 2 14 d067 b d 2 H068
225. r SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 5 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Warning information 0 Warning information WARNING Electrical equipment has components which are at dangerous voltage levels If these instructions are not strictly adhered to this can result in severe bodily injury and material damage Only appropriately qualified personnel may work on commission this equipment This personnel must be completely knowledgable about all the warnings 4nd service measures according to this User Manual It is especially important that the warning information in the relevant Operating Instructions MASTERDRIVES or DC MASTER is striqtly observed Definitions e Qualified personnel for the purpose of this User Manual and product labels are personnel who are familiar with the installation mounting start up and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved He or she must have the following qualifications 1 Trained and authorized to energize de energize clear ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety procedures 2 Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety procedures 3 Trained in rendering first aid DANGER For the purpose of this User Manual and product labels Danger indicates death severe personal injury and or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken indicates death severe personal
226. r mode change Operating enable 18 8 B2508 Polarity saturation setpoint 16 8 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Speed setpoint conditioning Sheet 5 Nset 5 8 Setp reverse winding 0 0 KR0303 gt Active gearbox Speed setpoint t 3 2 6a 1 15a 4 20 1 ratio 5 8 Reverse winding after splice 21 8 B2505 n 0 13a 5 22 4 Pre control torque 9b 8 Supplementary torque setpoint 3 2 6a 3 15a 4 Input pos torque limit Torque limit 0 2 H147 H610 351 KR0556 gt Gufan aidon ee gt kR0313 gt gt KR Positive torque Input negative torque limit limit 3 2 6a 3 Tension control on 8 2 B2503 Local operator control 17 8 KR0557 gt KR0343 gt Negative torque GT opang control Changeover pre limit 3 2 6a 3 0 1 control torque 9 7 t neg torque Winder 16 8 limit 15a 5 No OFF3 17 3 Winding from at Winder and winding below 16 4 from the top or unwind stand and winding from below Maximum braking torque Braking characteristic 2 0 LH259_ Speed actual value 13 4 KR0307 0 0 L H257 Reduced braking torque 0 01 H256 _ H258 2 0 Start of adaption End of adaption Standstill identification Velocity actual value 5 4 0 01 Limit value for standstill ident B2502 1 Standstill 7 5 13a 5 18 6 Standard SPW 420 axial winder software
227. r output if H203 3 5 TENSZ_07 T1960 Y Pre control torque friction compensation DIAMZ_07 P920 Y Pre control torque inertia compensation DIAMZ_01 P530 Y Sum tension controller output Sum of the tension controller from the PI component and D component PID controller TENSZ_01 T1798 Y Tension controller D component TENSZ_01 T1796 Y Tension controller output from the PI component TENSZ_01 T1790 Y Analog input 1 terminals 90 91 IF_CU AIH0 Y Analog input 2 terminals 92 93 IF_CU AI25 Y Analog input 3 tension actual value smoothed terminals 94 99 IF_CU AI51 Y Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Min Max Type Min Max Unit Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Min Max Type Parameters 150000 m R 2 0 2 0 R 2 0 2 0 R 2 0 127 Parameters d323 b d 10 d324 b d 10 d327 b d 13 d328 b d 7 d329 b d 6a d330 b d 20 d331 b d 6a d332 b d 22b 128 Analog input 4 smoothed terminals 95 99 Min Max IF_CU AI66 Y Type Analog input 5 pressure actual value from the dancer roll terminals 96 99 Min Max IF_CU AI70 Y Type External web velocity actual value Min Max 1Q1Z_01 A
228. rd 2 15 to CU H533 2000 B H534 2000 Status word 1 2 from CU 13a 4 18 6 Receive data B2504_ S J H535 2000 nea E ne Word 1 K4549 Status word 1 from CU Word 2 KR0550 gt Speed actual value from CU 13 4 Word 3 KR0551 gt Actual value W3 from CU Word 4 B2675 Status word 2 from CU Bit 0 15 Word 5 KR0552 gt Torque setpoint 6a 1 Wort 6 KR0553 gt Torque actual value 7 4 20 1 Word 7 KR0554 gt Actual value W7 from CU Word 8 KRo555 gt Actual value W8 from CU Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R CU Interface Sheet 15a H033 2615 H029 2622 Mot pot 2 B2622 B raise 19 2 B2615 B Control word 1 15 from CB 22a 4 B2655 __ Control word 1 15 from PTP 22a 5 Control word 2 2 from CB 22a 7 H034 2629 H030 2630 Mot pot 1 B2630 B raise 19 2 B2629 B Control word 2 10 from CB 22a 7 Control word 2 9 from CB 22a 7 H035 2633 B2633 B Mot pot 2 H031 2623 B2623 B Control word 2 3 from CB 22a 7 lower 19 2 Control word 2 13 from CB 22a 7 H036 2000 H032 2631 Mot pot 1 B2631 _ B lower 19 2 B2000 JB Control word 2 11 from CB 22a 7 Constant digital output
229. re package STEP7 CFC D7 Or Service IBS V5 0 German English 6DD1803 1BA1 Table 1 3 Components to adapt the software package using CFC 1 2 2 Interface module CB For applications which require the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES or SIMOREG DC MASTER drive converters to be coupled with a higher level automation system interface modules are used depending on the protocol used Thus it is possible for automation systems to read and change setpoints actual values technology parameters as well as base drive converter parameters PROFIBUS DP is the preferred communications type In this case the interface modules CBP with ADP or CB1 are required also refer to Chapter 1 1 10 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Overview 1 3 Overview of the closed loop winder control Applications The standard Axial winder software package allows in conjunction with the appropriate devices winders and unwinders to be implemented for the widest range of applications This include for example foil machines all types of printing machines coating systems paper finishing machines coilers for wire drawing machines textile machines and coilers for sheet steel 1 3 1 Hardware software prerequisites Hardware Software The drive converter must be designed for 4 Q operation as braking must be possible The minimum software releases are required as follows Base drive converter modules e CU
230. red by activating the inching commands It is also possible to change into another local mode during this time Mixed operation For system operation it is possible to input the local setpoints using H166 1 In this case only the appropriate setpoint is switched through with the local control signals and added to the velocity setpoints refer to Chapter 3 3 4 H146 Closed loop speed control for local Changeover between closed loop speed or velocity 28 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description operation control refer to Chapter 5 H161 Ramp up ramp down time Ramp times for the override local ramp fct generator H163 Select positioning reference value Refer to Chapter 5 H026 H091 H166 Enable addition of local setpoints Refer to Chapter 5 d344 Velocity setpoint This is used to calculate the speed setpoint Table 3 4 Parameters to the setpoint for the local operating modes 3 1 2 5 Limiting the velocity setpoint Effective The velocity setpoint is limited for the direct and indirect tension control only for H203 lt 2 closed loop via the torque limits Therefore the following is possible a Velocity setpoints which are not required can be suppressed e g for a rewinder b Automatic web sag protection using overcontrol 3 1 2 6 Winder overcontrol In order to prevent that a full roll accelerates up to an inadmissible speed when the web breaks the setpoint of the w
231. rminal 45 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description Diameter actual value from PROFIBUS received word 3 Example b L Hogg KR0451 Set diameter from PROFIBUS control word 1 15 gt H024 B2615 The above connections are realized via BICO technology For dancer rolls For applications with a dancer roll in speed correction operation H203 3 or 5 the constant deviation of the dancer roll position can be taken into account in the diameter computer using parameters H254 and H255 This increases the accuracy of the diameter calculation especially when accelerating or decelerating or if there is a constant deviation between the position setpoint and actual value Parameter Parameter name Explanation H013 Source surface tachometer on Command compute diameter with surface tachometer H024 Source set diameter Command set diameter using terminal 56 H089 Source diameter setting value Refer to Chapter 5 H093 Source velocity actual value surface Refer to Chapter 5 tachometer H094 Source external web velocity actual value Refer above only for H211 1 H210 Adjustment web velocity Refer to Chapter 5 H211 Select web tachometer Command with without web tachometer H213 Pulse number web tachometer Pulse number each revolution H215 Rated speed measuring roll web Rated speed for normalization tachometer H216 Computation internal diameter computer Time for one revo
232. rs to enter the web speed setpoint compensation 3 1 2 3 Speed setpoint for winder operation Prerequisite The following operator controls are required for winder operation CU system operation e Command Off1 On 1 active the base drive is powered on main contactor closed e The Local operator control control signal must be 0 e The software package and base drive wait for an operation enable signal from System start s The winder accelerates up to the specified setpoint Central ramp For this system operation a central ramp function generator is effective function for the speed setpoint generator The ramp up ramp down times and the ramp up ramp down rounding off functions are set using parameters H133 H134 H135 and H136 The upper and lower limits can be specified using parameters H131 and H132 The value from H130 can be entered as new setpoint using the Accept setpoint B command via H037 The Accept setpoint A command H036 switches a new selectable setpoint block diagram 13 with H096 The ramp function generator is held with the Ramp function generator hold command H049 or Set speed setpoint to stop H034 The speed setpoint is transferred directly to the closed loop control without being influenced by the ramp function generator using H154 1 In this case it is possible to use smoothing which can be set using H155 This operating mode is practical if th
233. rsion 2 0 Digital inputs outputs 7 8 Web break 6 8 Standstill 8 2 Tension control on Status word 1 2 from CU 15a 3 CU in operation 6 8 n 0 10 4 Lim val monit 1 Digital outputs on the T400 Digital output 1 l Status word 2 9 to CB H521 2501 mS Terminal 46 JB I Digital output 2 I 1522 2502 pe ae Terminal 47 2 B Status word 2 12 to CB Digital output 3 i H523 2503 S Terminal 48 J B Status word 2 10 to CB Digital output 4 l H524 2504 Terminal 49 JB Status word 1 2 to CB and PTP Digital output 5 l H525 2505 Terminal 52 J B Status word 2 8 to CB Digital output 6 l B2114 I H526 2114 Terminal 51 7 B l S Status word 2 13 to CB P24 external d Terminal 45 M24 external o Terminal 50 Selection B2527 H521 1 Selection B2528 H522 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet 13a Serial interface 2 for the peer to peer protocol terminal 72 75 Status word1PTP 2 5 H015 335 Send data Actual value W2 PTP 2 5 H016 310 Word 1 Sender Term 74 Word 2 Tx Word 3 E Tx Actual value W4 PTP 2 5 Word 4 Term 75 Word 5 Actual value W5 PTP 2 5 H065 0 KR Receive data Control word 1 PTP 22a 2 Word 1 B2655 Term 72 Receiver O Rx Word 2 KR0018 gt Setpoint W2 PTP 2 5 Word 3 KR0019 gt Setpoint W3 PTP 2 5 Rx Word
234. s in ge arbox stage 1 if available 1Q1Z_01 A360 X 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 B2407 1 20 2 0 1 20 2 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H129 b d 18 H130 b d 5 H131 b d 5 H132 b d 5 H133 b d 5 H134 b d 5 H135 b d 5 H136 b d 5 H137 b d 5 H138 b d 11 H139 b d 5 Input alternative On command The command selection to power on the equipment can be connected with the application specific source Generally this is the availability of a specific operating mode However one of the digital select inputs can be used Default B2000 constant digital output Y 0 1Q1Z_01 SELMX Setpoint B The fixed value as velocity setpoint is entered with the control signal accept setpoint B in front of the ramp function generator SREFZ_01 S25 X2 Upper limit Maximum limit for the central ramp function generator SREFZ_01 S50 LU Lower limit Minimum limit for the central ramp function generator SREFZ_01 S50 LL Ramp up time For the central velocity ramp function generator SREFZ_01 S50 TU Ramp down time For the central velocity ramp function generator SREFZ_01 S50 TD Rounding off at acceleration For the central velocity ramp function generator SREFZ_01 S50 TRU Rounding off at deceleration For the central velocity ramp function generator SREFZ_01 S50 TRD Normalization web velocity compensation
235. s own serial peer to peer interface Errors which occur are always signaled as alarm and fault messages they can be suppressed using H011 and H012 150 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Commissioning the winder 7 1 1 Resources used for adaptation and commissioning Tools Various resources are available to adapt the standard software package to the particular application Name Explanation Input field for all MASTERDRIVES and DC Master units with 4 digit display OP1S Operator control device with numerical keypad and 4 line text display this can be directly connected to the PMU SIMOVIS Commissioning and parameterizing software for the PC Windows It also offers an oscilloscope function for MASTERDRIVES MC VC and oe V Graphic configuring engineering tool which was used to generate the standard software package This is connected to the service interface of the T400 Prerequisite STEP 7 D7 SYS Service IBS Basic commissioning and diagnostics tool for PC DOS It is also available as Telemaster for remote diagnostics Table 7 1 Adaptation and commissioning tools Comparison The resources essentially differ by the intervention possibilities which are shown in the following table Change connection BICO with BICO BICO esl SA Insert block Delete block Change cycle time for processing Duplicate software Duplicate complete parameter set Table 7 2 Compari
236. s speeds After the acceleration sequence has decayed the torque setpoint monitored at d331 should be lt 2 if gearbox stage 2 is used a minimum of the 2 above mentioned points should be used in order to define adaptation factor H229 or H128 7 2 3 Compensating the accelerating torque block diagram 9b Applications Prerequisite Procedure The inertia compensation should be set for winders with indirect tension control and for direct tension control with tension transducer if the accelerating torque cannot be neglected with respect to the other torque For closed loop dancer roll controls generally it is not necessary to compensate the accelerating torque If the compensation friction torque is required the friction characteristic must be carefully commissioned refer to Section 7 2 2 General procedure for inertia compensation system operation of the winder e g by connecting HO69 to connector KRO068 The required velocity setpoint is entered using H068 enter the actual diameter as setting value and select via H089 activate the setting command check using d310 enter a ramp up ramp down time at H133 H134 which corresponds to the system acceleration time select H220 so that it also corresponds to the system acceleration time when the on command OFF1 and system start is activated an up ramp is started the component of the speed controller in the basic drive is monitored whe
237. se drive is powered down if the winder is still running the velocity setpoint is set to 0 The system is shutdown when the standstill limit has been fallen below Only then is the System start control signal switched out The winder can only be operated in the closed loop tension controlled mode in system operation The system start control signal H0121 must remain active until the basic drive is powered down otherwise the motor coasts down Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description In order to select a local operating mode the Local operator control control signal H027 must be 1 The run crawl and positioning operating modes are activated with a positive edge of the appropriate control signal and are internally stored For inching the operating mode only remains active as long as the appropriate control command is present The operating modes are mutually interlocked i e only one can be active at any one time When an operating mode is switched in out the associated setpoint is transferred to the closed loop control via the override ramp function generator At each operating mode change the ramp function generator will first be set to the actual value This is realized both when switching in as well as when switching out For the base drive a power on command is generated to close the main contactor Operation is automatically enabled when the drive signals back a ready
238. sex 10000ms_ gs Status wordi PiP IF PEER Zustandswortx kasas ho Hors laua nag w2PiP IF PEERIstwert wax kroso R H017 laua nag wa PiP IF PEER Istwert wax krossa LR Ho21 input systemstat Siz on piol e xx3s Ho22 input tension controleron SS LOTS BLR fe xx4 s H023 input inhibittension controler fianz ors121 Rene s Ho24 input set diameter BLR Renn Ho25 input enter supplementary setpoint fianz org1 B2007 s Ho26 input Ical positioning fiaz orsis Rena s H027 l input local operator contr fianz orse e xx9 s B2010 TS Ho29 l input motorized potentiometer 2 raise iaz o1 B201 Baeza H030 _ input motorized potentiometer 1 raise iaz o1 B4o Beso H031 _ input motorized potentiometer 2 ower iaz o1 B301 Bees H032 _ input motorized potentiometer 1 lower iaz o1 B501 fe s de H033 input noid diameter fiaz ozseon Bees s H034 input set v_settostp TTT e 9 s B B B B fie 2 B IR B E H036 Input accept setpoint A IQ1Z_07 B90 1 B2000 H035 Input winding from below 1Q1Z_07 B70 B2633 H037 Input accept setpoint B 1Q1Z_07 B100 1 B2000 168 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Appendix B2001 H049 Input ramp function generator stop T 1 1Z_07 B2021 sf Bens Ho50 Input enable setpoint Taz 7 82031 sens 14051 Input standstill tensionon Taz o7 B2041 sets IQ1Z_07 B205 1 Haga Inpu
239. shes the initialization status for all of the parameters The key parameter H250 must be set to 165 Note observe 7 1 2 CONTZ_01 URLAD ERA Ramp up ramp down time override ramp function generator Ramp times for the local ramp function generator it is set to the corresponding actual value at each operating mode change when operation is enabled and when the winding direction changes SREFZ_07 S457 X Smoothing speed controller output Smoothing for display parameter d331 smoothed torque setpoint SREFZ_07 NT130 T Select positioning setpoint Selects from either x or x characteristic for the positioning reference value 0 x characteristic 1 Y characteristic SREFZ_01 328 Smoothing saturation setpoint Smoothing time for the saturation setpoint SREFZ_01 S395 T Smoothing speed actual value Smoothing time speed actual value for the diameter computer compensation torques and monitoring functions IQIZ_01 AI325 T Enable addition of local setpoints H166 1 allows a local setpoint to be added in system operation When a local operated mode is selected then only the appropriate local setpoint is switched through This is added to the velocity setpoint the override ramp function generator is in this case effective 0 addition inhibited T addition released CONTZ_01 C22 13 Density correction limiting This is the value by which the density correction factor can deviate from a maximum of 1 0 DIAMZ_07 DC
240. signal This also sets the override ramp function generator In the inching mode the winder operates with the appropriate setpoint only as long as the inching command is active After this the drive remains powered up for a time which can be set using H014 The drive automatically shuts down when the delay time expires It is possible to disable all of the local operating modes with Local stop H028 or by withdrawing the Local operator control H027 The winder decelerates to a web velocity of 0 0 and after the standstill limit is fallen below it shuts down The local setpoints refer as standard to the web velocity It is possible to changeover to the closed loop speed control mode with H146 1 refer to Chapter 3 1 2 4 s Local run Select the source for the control command using H052 Select the source for the setpoint using H075 pre setting H075 KRO0074 0 0 s Local crawl Select the source for the control command using H039 The crawl setpoint is entered with H142 pre setting 0 1 e Local inching forwards backwards The source of the inching forwards backwards command is selected using H038 or H040 The setpoints are set using parameters H143 and H144 and as standard 0 05 and 0 05 In the inching modes the drive only moves with the selected setpoint for the time that the control command is present Note It is possible to changeover from the inching mode into any other local opera
241. sing d345 For H282 0 the values must be set in the base drive as shown in Table 3 13 The speed controller optimization run of the basic drive can be H282 0 used Parameter Value Explanation CUVC CUMC CUD1 T400 P233 0 P556 0 H150 0 0 Start of adaptation J v start In the converter P234 100 P559 100 H152 1 0 End of adaptation J v end P235 P550 H151 Kp adaptation min P236 P225 H153 Kp adaptation max Table 3 13 Parameters for the Kp adaptation in the drive converter Note We recommend that the kp adaptation is commissioned for winding ratios gt 3 otherwise the basic setting should be used H151 H153 1 and P235 P236 100 for CUVC Param Parameter name Explanation H150 1 Start of adaptation J v stat First point of intervention of the Kp adapt generally 0 0 H151 Kp adaptation min Kp for an empty reel generally 1 0 42 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description H152 End of adaptation J v end Last point of intervention of the Kp adaptation generally 1 0 H153 Kp adaptation max Kp for a full roll H162 Smoothing speed controller output Smoothing for the visualization parameter d331 H282 Changeover to the speed controller on H282 0 speed controller on CU ee ee monomo 10 OO H294 Integral action time speed controller For the speed controller on T400 H282 1 d308 Variable moment of inertia Display parameter d329 Torque setpoint calculated
242. sion controller and the _ tension controller on command must be inactive For the very first roll the tension controller on signal is used to activate the tension controller The setpoint for the reverse winding function is entered at H149 the value must be negative refer to Fig 3 3 To sense a new diameter a diameter must first be set e g the average value from the highest and lowest possible diameter for a splice The new reel is then powered up with a local operating mode and runs at a low speed The tachometer is then applied and this is signaled using a digital signal The diameter computer is enabled and calculates the actual diameter of the new roll The drive is then shutdown again powered down The swiveling mechanism is rotated into the changeover position for splicing refer to Fig 3 4 The drive with the new roll is powered up again If it is running in system operation it synchronizes to the web velocity The Tension controller on signal from the terminal or via the control bit must be inactive However the drive still remains in the closed loop speed control mode until the Knife in the cutting position signal becomes active It then switches over to closed loop tension controller The partner drive which was previously in the closed loop tension control mode goes into a fast stop Depending on the parameterization of H148 149 it rotates backwards for some time before it shuts down Axial
243. son of the adaptation and commissioning tools Change execution sequence Parameter lists 7 1 2 Specification of the parameter numbers In addition to the technology parameters for the drive converters used there are so called basic drive parameters These should be taken from the associated function charts of the documentation of the drive converter used Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 151 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Commissioning the winder It should be observed that parameters are selected by entering the Note number e g at the drive converter operator panel When displayed the most significant position is replaced by a letter which indicates whether it involves a quantity which can be changed or not changed Example In order to select technology parameter H956 1956 is entered Value Significance Parameter display example range can be changed cannot be changed 0 999 Lower parameter range of the drive converter P123 1000 1999 Lower parameter range of the T400 H123 d123 2000 2999 Upper parameter range of the drive converter U123 3000 3999 Upper parameter range of the T400 L123 Table 7 3 Parameter number specification 7 1 3 BICO technology BICO parameters This standard software package is extremely flexible when it comes to the freely connectable input and output signals using BICO technology Contrary to value parameters BICO parameters define connections This
244. t 6 gt Velocity setpoint m D V set Vact Axis tachometer Term 90 91 Term 92 93 H 069 320 H 094 321 Gee Sea ees oe m s m m 8 s e N Tension setpoint C H 08 Diam eter nact 0 computer lt 2 gt a 8 191 Tension controller Vact L im iting n pa V set l l l l r l l l l gt l R lt 3 gt L aa v C O I x PO S lt 7 gt Speed l l l s l l l k l s l S l l D lt 1 gt setpoint Speed act value P443 3002 P734 02 148 Variable moment of inertia 9 7 K p adaption D na Width a 2 Speed controller y y y 1P232 3008 C om pen 9 h sations b Torque setpoint P734 05 165 Supplementary torque setpoint P506 3005 h Qa Monitoring 20 Torque actual value P694 006 264 CU V C LT SZ Current controller UT Fig 4 17 Winder with closed loop constant v control 3 Page 3 in the block diagram lt 2 gt Information in the text 90 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples 4 14 Configuring example Cut tension with freely assignable blocks Freely assignable Frequently used freely assignable function blocks are shown in block blocks diagram 23a 23b These are used to implement customized requirements also refer to Chapter 7 6 Application profile A winder with tension transducer
245. t reset length computer Taz _07 B206 B2ss2 054 Adaptation analoginputt TIE GADOR tc IF_CU AI10 OFF loos 1 0 1 0 059 Offset anaoginouts TIE cuamoorr sfc IF_CU AI55 OFF Adaptation analog input 5 iecuamaxi stor 063 Offset analoginouts TIE GARGEE scsi Hos4 T ActualvauesPtP CIE PEERIstwert wax T KROODD R H065 Actual value 5 PtP IF_PEER Istwert_W5 X KR0000 Hose Fixed value velocity setpoint fiaz orarooax foo H070 pied value web velocity compensation IIO orarroax foo H072 Fixed value s uppl velocity setpoint iaz oraizoax too H074 Fixed value s etpoint local operation f iz orazsoax tao H075 input setpoint tocat operation fiz oraizsox krooza r H076 Fred value e temat viet TET fo H077 input etema avot TETE kroos R Ho80_ Tensionsetpoint_ f iz onaeoax fo H082 Fixed value supplementary tension setpoint lio oraizzoax foo IQ1Z_01 A1280A X loo i Hose Maximum tension reduction fiaz orasoax to H090 Fixed value s etpoint positioning fiaz onalsioax foo H092 Input speed actual value IQ1Z_01 A1320 X KR0550 H091 Input setpoint positioning IQ1Z_01 A1310 X KR0090 H093 Input V_act connection tachometer IQ1Z_01 A1329 X KR0401 H095 Fred vaue s etpomna fiaz on alsaoax foo Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 169 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Appendix Ho98 Analog output 2 diameter act val term 96 99 IF CUAGSOX kroso r Hoa Analog outpu
246. t 2 disa IF cu agsoorr Joo H100 l Analog output 2 normalization iF cu aasoaxa 0 H101 Analog output toffset_ IF cuaanoorr Joo H102 Analog output 1 normalization iF cuaonoax jo IR 1 IQ2Z 01 G110 HY sp ius Po E wo H129 input alternative on command fianz orseLmx 82000 SREFZ_01 825 x2 E 30000 ms Kak 0 H146 Speed control for local operation l SREFZOINCHI2I2 fo H149 n_set reverse winding after spice SREFZO7AWi00X tao mss Start of adaptation srez ozncossai fo 170 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Appendix H153 Kp adaptation max SREFZ_07 NC035 B2 0 H154 SREFZ_01 847 1 H155 Smoothing web velocity setpoint SREFZ_01 S10 T 8ms oO H157 H159 Delay standstil identification SREFZO7 S840T lins H160 H161 Ramp up e replacing ral g 20000 ms H162 Smoothing speed controller output SREFZ_07 NT130 T 500 ms H163 Selection positioning setpoint SREFZ_01 S328 I H164 Smoothing saturation setpoint SREFZ_01 S395 T 8ms H165 Smoothing speed actual value IQIZ_01 A1325 T 20 ms H166 Enable addition local setpoints CONTZ_01 C22 13 H167 Limiting density correction DIAMZ_07 DC1000 X H168 Integrating time density correction DIAMZ_07 DC70 TI 200000 ms H172 Smoothing tension actual value TENSZ_01 1641 T 150 ms H173 Differentiating time constant TENSZ_01 T1796 TD 800 ms 10000 ms H174 Inhibit D controller TENSZ_01 1T643 1 H175 Ramp
247. t 24 Connctor display R type Binnector display B tvpe Connector display l t Input Anz_R1 1 Input Anz_I1 a561 1 Input Anz_B1 i l a581 H560 0 H570 2000 Input Anz_R2 Tass Input Anz_B2 H562 0 i hea 1 Output Anz_R2 eats 1 Se E Input Anz_R3 a565 H564 0 sme Output Anz_R3 Input Anz_R4 567 H566 0 kss 1 Output Anz_R4 Standard SPW420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Free display parameters Sheet 25 Appendix 10 5 CFC charts Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 183 6DD1903 0ABO0 Edition 07 99
248. technology parameter Min 2 0 Max 2 0 b d 12 1Q1Z_01 Al260A X Type R H081 Input tension setpoint Value KR0080 The input for the tension position reference value must be connected with the Type R application specific source Default KR0080 output from H080 fixed value b d 12 IQ1Z_01 A1260 X H082 Fixed value supplementary tension setpoint Value 0 0 Enters a fixed value as technology parameter Min 2 0 Max 2 0 b d 12 1Q1Z_01 Al270A X Type R H083 Input supplementary tension setpoint Value KR0082 The input for the tension supplementary position reference value must be connected Type R with the application specific source Default KR0082 output from H082 fixed value b d 12 1Q1Z_01 Al270 X H084 Fixed value tension actual value Value 0 0 Enters a fixed value as technology parameter Min 2 0 Max 2 0 b d 12 1Q1Z_01 Al280A X Type R H085 Input tension actual value Value KR0322 The input for the tension position actual value must be connected with the Type R application specific source Default KR0322 analog input 3 smoothed terminals 94 99 Alternative KR0084 fixed value tension actual value b d 12 IQ1Z_01 A1280 X H086 Fixed value maximum tension reduction Value 0 0 Enters a fixed value as technology parameter Min 2 0 Max 2 0 b d 12 1Q1Z_01 Al290A X Type R H087 Input maximum tension reduction Value KR0086 The input for the tension supplementary position reference value must be connected Type R with
249. tension on 8 2 B2503 amp 1 Minimum selection For dancer roll 0 Tension reduction 3 1 0 1 0 Higo gt l KR0328 Maximum tension 4 eE l l l Tension setpoint K T 2 3 Tension reduction max after the winding hardness 12 3 x x xX Web break detection characteristic Enable H285 1 9 A Tension reduction 2 Tension reduction 1 1 0 Ta raas B2501 Web break 13a 5 22 5 B Delay of Web break signal Tension setp Tension Z Actual diameter KR0310 9a 8 Inp Web break signal Dir tension contr tension o 9 H253 2253 4 B Web break 1 0 05 M Xe M 8 1 9a 1 TAN B2253 13 6 Lower limit webbreak 0005 7 HY intern Web Inhibit tension controller lt S i ificati i and diameter computer p4 Diameter identification break sign 0 web break only as if web break 1 1 H R signal Start of tension reduction Torque X2 control Diameter D H183 1 0 act value X1 X2 H203 gt 2 3 8 15a 7 Diameter D1 H184 1 i H185 mae ls Diameter D2 Output tension gt KR0313 NY x X1 gt X2 Diameter D3 H186 control 8 8 x2 1 End of tension reduction diameter D 4 H187 Winding hardness char G L m ee ee Tension controller on 17 8 0 25 ay act value Torque actual value lt 75 12 3 of the tension controller output KR0311 150 m EZ Kons Tension actual value Time constants smoothed Enable tension offset compensation 0 L H179 Hold diameter 16 4
250. ter material reels layer jumps e g when winding cables roll changes 4 6 3 Direct closed loop tension control with a tension transducer Tension A tension transducer directly measures the material tension e g a measurement tension transducer from FAG Kugelfischer or Philips The output signal of the tension transducer is proportional to the tension and is fed to the tension controller as actual value signal Concept When appropriately controlling the torque limits the tension controller H203 1 specifies the torque setpoint For normal winding operation the E secondary speed controller is not effective as a result of the overcontrol If the web breaks or the material sags the winder speed is controlled by the speed controller Closed loop torque limiting control refer to the configuring examples Chapters 4 11 and 4 12 The tension setpoint can either be entered internally or externally 4 6 4 Closed loop constant v control Secondary The closed loop control techniques which have been discussed up until condition now using either indirect or direct tension control assume that the web velocity is kept constant at a nip position outside the winder For instance this can be using two rolls which are pressed together and driven at an appropriate speed through which the web material is fed If there is no nip position then a tension control cannot be realized and the winder is normally just controlled to keep the
251. the analog input with H058 to 1 0 the winding hardness characteristic should be disabled using H206 1 for the dancer roll control H190 can be used to realize tension pre control via the torque limits H203 2 The main tension setpoint is multiplied by the diameter and H190 and added to the controller output alternatively pre control can also be realized if the web tension is not available or is not known In this case it is necessary that a pressure actual value is received from the dancer roll which is read in via Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 159 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Commissioning the winder analog input 5 In this case a negative adaptation factor H190 must be entered the D controller for the position controller must enabled with H174 0 this is generally always required for dancer roll position controls in order to prevent the dancer roll oscillating When optimizing the D controller starting from the pre setting it is preferable change H173 for the correct setting the dancer roll must remain steady with the exception of mechanical influences Checking the system operation with low web velocity control sense set the correct diameter and enable the tension control check the control sense according to the following table Actual value lt setpoint Poo oo c l Table 7 5 Checking the control sense Dancerrollatthetop le W inder Center positi
252. the fixed standstill tension setpoint set at H189 depending on which of the two values is the lower H188 0 amp H191 1 Illegal operating status H157 Limit value for the standstill identification Refer to Chapter 5 H159 Delay standstill identification Delay time before the standstill signal is issued H188 Source standstill tension Operating status refer above H189 Standstill tension Enter the fixed value Table 3 8 Parameters for the setpoint tension position controller 3 2 Sensing actual values 3 2 1 Selecting the speed actual value block diagram 13 Source The axial winder requires the speed actual value to calculate the diameter There are five possibilities to transfer the speed actual value to the T400 e Directly via the T400 interface pulse encoder 1 e Via the CU backplane bus e Actual value W2 received from the CU e Analog inputs of T400 e Via the T400 interface pulse encoder 2 The actual speed can be monitored at display parameter d307 as a percentage of the maximum motor speed Parameterization Table 3 9 summarizes all of the parameters which have to be set for the speed actual value acquisition Parameter Parameter name Explanation H092 Source speed actual Freely connectable from the source value 32 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description H165 Smoothing speed act Smoothing time speed actual value value H212 Encoder pulse number
253. tial controller PD l e H174 0 H196 1 and H283 0 For applications with the tension transducer via the torque limits H203 1 the tension controller is normally used as proportional integral controller Pl Limiting the The output signal of the tension controller is limited depending on the tension controller setting of parameters H194 and H195 H194 1 The output signal is limited to a positive value which is set at H195 Negative values are limited to zero This setting is only practical when using a 1Q drive for H203 0 1 and 2 H194 2 The output signal is limited to values between H195 H194 3 The upper limit corresponds to the absolute speed actual value or a minimum value which can be set with H193 The negative limit value is zero H194 lt 4 The upper limit value corresponds to the absolute speed actual value or a minimum value which can be set with H193 the lower limit value corresponds to the inverted signal 3 4 3 1 Kp adaptation Analog to the speed controller also here the controller proportional gain is adapted to the variable moment of inertia which means that the influence of the diameter material width and density as well as a possible gearbox changeover can be automatically taken into account Parameterization Setting parameters Kp min H197 Controller gain for an empty roll Kp max H198 Controller gain at 1 0 J v Jv start H207 Start of adaptation generally at 0 0 Jvend H208 End of adaptation g
254. tic is 0 5 b If the diameter is greater than or equal to the final diameter H187 then the output of the winding hardness characteristic is 0 20 c If the diameter lies between the initial diameter H183 and the final diameter H187 then the output follows the programmed winding hardness characteristic and has values between 0 50 and 0 20 Note If a decreasing winding hardness is not required e g for unwinder then parameter H206 must be set to 1 aa2a Tension setpoint ater the winding archessoh S Table 3 7 Parameters for the setpoint tension position controller 3 1 3 2 Standstill tension block diagram 7 Standstill When the winder is at a standstill it is possible to changeover from the identification standard operating tension to the standstill tension using the command block diagram 6 Standstill tension On with H188 The prerequisite is that the standstill limit H157 has been fallen below and that a delay time H159 has expired Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 31 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description The standstill setpoint can be selected from the following H188 1 amp H191 0 _ The standstill setpoint is a fixed value which can be set with H189 Standstill setpoint H188 lt 0 amp H191 0 _ The standstill setpoint is a percentage value of the operating tension setpoint and is set using H189 H188 1 amp H191 1 The standstill setpoint is an operating t ension setpoint or is
255. ting mode without powering down the drive e Local positioning The source of the positioning command is selected using H026 The source of the positioning setpoint is selected using H091 The Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 37 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description setpoint is used internally as X or X characteristic changeover using H163 For all of the local operating modes the setpoint is changed using the internal override ramp function generator The ramp up and ramp down time is entered using H161 and refers to a 1 0 setpoint Parameters Refer to Table 3 3 and Table 3 4 Using H166 1 it is possible in system operation to add the local setpoints with the tension control enabled to the velocity setpoint For a velocity setpoint of 0 0 for example the appropriate inching setpoint can be entered via the override ramp function generator using the Inching forwards command It is possible to add each individual local setpoint with the appropriate command The same interlocking conditions apply as for the local operating modes A change for example from closed loop tension controlled inching into winding operation can be easily realized via the Enable setpoint control input of the central ramp function generator Mixed operation 3 3 5 Motorized potentiometer functions block diagram 19 Two motorized The winder software package has two separate motorized potentiometer potenti
256. to peer protocol through configuring This protocol allows data to be extremely quickly transferred without any delay to additional T400 other drive converters with SCB 2 SIMOREG 6RA24 and 6RA70 refer to Table 2 5 and Table 2 6 Pre assignment This interface has the following pre assignment baud rate H245 19200 baud monitoring time limit H246 H247 10000 9920ms telegram length 5 words 1 control word and 4 setpoints NOTE The telegram may include a maximum of 5 words each 16 bit The maximum baud rate is 38400 baud Caution The terminating resistors of the interface used must be switched in to avoid data transfer disturbances switch S1 3 to S1 6 refer to 1 5 Enable The peer to peer communications can be inhibited using parameter H289 Thus all of the peer to peer relevant function blocks are deactivated Control word 1 refer to block diagram 22a Setpoint W2 d018 refer to b d 14 Setpoint W3 d019 refer to b d 14 Setpoint W4 d066 refer to b d 14 Setpoint W5 d067 refer to b d 14 Table 2 5 Receive data from peer to peer 2 ms sampling time Telegram word Send data Parameter T400 Status word 1 status word 1 from T400 H015 4335 r t b d 22b Actual value W2 actual diameter H016 310 r t o d 14 Actual value W3 velocity setpoint H017 340 r t b d 14 4 Actual value W4 H064 0 r t b d 14 Actual value W5 H065 0 r t b d 14 Table 2 6 Send data from peer to peer 2 ms sampli
257. ts T400 module 16ms cycle time 2 2 2 Analog inputs and outputs Scaling An output and input voltage of 10 V corresponds to an internal value of 1 0 The gain in the following table offers additional normalization possibilities Analog inputs Analog value terminal voltage scaling factor offset The following tables indicate the relevant T400 analog inputs for commissioning the closed loop control core Para in Term Significance pre assignment T400 d320 90 91 Analog input 1 H054 H055 d321 92 93 Analog input 2 H056 H057 d322 94 99 Analog input 3 smoothed tension actual value H058 H059 from the tension transducer d323 95 99 Analog input 4 smoothed H060 H061 d324 96 99 Analog input 5 pressure actual value from H062 H063 dancer roll Table 2 11 Terminal assignment analog inputs T400 module 2ms cycle time Analog outputs Terminal voltage value offset scaling factor The SPW420 closed loop control used two analog outputs Characteristics 0 V is output in the initialization phase Representation 10V 1 0 e g 100 speed Freely Both analog outputs are pre assigned They can be freely interconnected interconnectable using BICO technology Para in Term Significance pre assignment T400 H103 97 99 Analog output 1 torque setpoint H102 H101 H098 98 99 Analog output 2 diameter actual value H100 H099 Table 2 12 Terminal assignment analog outputs T400 module 2ms cycle time Axial wi
258. tual values of speed torque and control deviation if the following conditions are fulfilled logical AND speed actual value is less than the speed actual value threshold amp torque actual value is greater than the torque actual value threshold amp control deviation is greater than the control deviation threshold If these three conditions exist simultaneously over the response time which can be parameterized the stall protection signal is generated and if required can cause the drive to be shutdown fault number 120 Parameter Parameter name Explanation H007 Speed actual value Less than the rated speed value threshold H008 Torque actual value Greater than the rated motor torque value threshold H009 Threshold control deviation Greater than the rated speed value Table 3 24 Parameters for stall protection identification 3 6 7 Receiving telegrams from CU CB and PTP block diagram 20 CU COMBOARD Peer to peer If a telegram is not received after power on and after the time set using H005 has expired the fault message is generated and causes the drive to be shutdown fault number 121 Not only is the first telegram monitored but the interval between telegram failures during communication are also monitored refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Fault number 122 The coupling is monitored in a similar way to the COMBOARD refer to Chapter 2 1 3 Fault number 123 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Man
259. ual 55 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description 3 7 Others 3 7 1 Free function blocks block diagram 23a 23b Goal In order to permit additional customer specific requirements the SPW420 has some frequently used free function blocks These free function blocks can be interconnected using simple parameterization via BICO technology An example with free blocks is shown in Chapter 4 14 Free blocks which e Arithmetic blocks are available No Multipliers 2 Adders 1 Subtractors 1 Polygon characteristic with two transition points 2 e Logic blocks Numerical changeover switch 3 Switch on delay 1 Switch off delay 1 Pulse shortener 1 Pulse generator 1 Inverter 1 Logical AND 1 Logical OR 1 Numerical comparator 1 e Closed loop control blocks Integrator 1 Limiter 1 PT1 element 1 e Constant blocks Fixed setpoint 3 Note Details on start up refer to Chapter 7 6 Details on the functions blocks refer to Lit 6 56 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description 3 7 2 Free display parameters block diagram 25 Destination The standard software package provides freely assignable display parameters for every data type to monitor available binectors connectors Using BICO technology every binector connector can be connected to the input of a display parameter The value of the binector con
260. ual value P443 3002 Src ene Gen Comoe nce con i Variable moment 19 S l of inertia K p adaption I D nact W idth gi Speed controller I Y U L gt P232 3008 Compe I sations Torque setpoint S P734 05 165 Supplementary torque setpoint P506 3005 O lt 10 gt I Monitoring 20 E i Z Torque act value z l P734 06 24 S st IIT 5 C U Vv C Current controller LE L T Fig 4 8 Winder with dancer roll closed loop speed correction control 3 Page 3 in the block diagram lt 2 gt Information in the text Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 79 Configuring instructions and examples 4 10 Configuring example Unwinder with dancer roll speed 80 correction Note lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt lt 9 gt lt 10 gt An example is shown in Fig 4 10 as to how an unwinder with dancer roll can be configured In this case the web velocity setpoint is entered at terminals 90 91 as analog signal An analog tachometer is used for speed actual value sensing The connection is made at the base drive and the actual value is transferred to the T400 via the dual port RAM The diameter computer continuously computes the diameter corresponding to the formula web velocit diameter we ee speed The analog dancer roll position actual value is connected at terminals 96 99 The dancer roll positio
261. up time tension setpoint TENSZ_01 T1350 TU H176 Ramp down time tension setpoint TENSZ_01 T1350 TD 10000 ms H178 Response for web break TENSZ_07 T2110 12 1 H179 H180 H181 H182 eA e o jo H183 Diameter at the start of tension reduction TENSZ 01 T1470 A1 a jo o jo 1 Se oO H186 Diameter D3 TENSZ_01 1T1470 A4 k oO H188 Input standstill tension TENSZ_01 1T1500 1 1 H191 TENSZ 01 71515 H192 Smoothing tension setpoint TENSZ 01 T1525 T 300 ms H194 Select tension controller limits TENSZ 01 T1715 X 1 1 0 0 2 H195 Adapt tension controller limits TENSZ_01 1T1745 X 1 0 H196 Inhibit component tension controller TENSZ_01 11790 HI H184 Diameter D1 TENSZ_01 11470 A2 oO wo H187 Diameter D4 end of tension reduction TENSZ_01 T1466 X H197 Minimum Kp tension controller TENSZ_01 T1770 B1 H198 Maximum Kp tension controller TENSZ_01 1T1770 B2 fo wo H170 Partner drive is closed loop tension controlled IQIZ_01 B53 1 B2000 1000 ms H199 Integral action time tension controller TENSZ_01 T1790 TN H200 Adapt setpoint pre control TENSZ_07 T1800 X1 H201 Lower limit web veloci TENSZ_07 T1900 X2 H177 Inhibit tension setpoint TENSZ_01 T1485 1 H185 Diameter D2 TENSZ_01 11470 A3 ere oO H190 Tension pre control dancer roll TENSZ_07 T1936 X H202 H203 H204 0 05 H205 3000 ms H169 Knife in the cutting position IQIZ_01 B52 1 B2000 H189 Standstill tension TENSZ_01 T1505 X2 oO a
262. ut 2 ADD_1 KR0840 gt Characteristics Output Kenn_1 x S H841 0 T End point Y2 0 0 c H811 0 T KR0804 gt KR KR Start point Y1 K Minuend SUB_1 B Input 1 MUL_2 S H812 0 me KR i End point X2 foie Start point X1 nd point KR Output MUL_2 Output SUB_1 Input 2 MUL_2 COED Subtrahend SUB_1 B KR0845 gt H846 0 T H813 0 KR KR Input quantity Kenn_2 T1 2 H809 0 KR End point Y2 0 0 H808 CJ Output Kenn_2 KR0809 gt Enable Free_block 0 Start point Y1 SC Sampling time T1 2ms T5 128ms Sequence in T1 or T5 3 Changeover E Input 1 UMS_1 Input 1 UMS_2 Input 1 UMS_3 H820 0 H823 0 H826 0 KR KR KR Input 2 UMS _1 E KR0822 gt Input 2 UMS_2 S Raag gt Input 2 UMS_3 E KR0828 gt H821 0 H824 0 H827 0 KR Output UMS_1 KR Output UMS_2 KR Output UMS_3 Switch signal UMS_1 Switch signal UMS_2 Switch signal UMS_3 F H822 2000 H825 2000 H828 2000 B B B Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Arithmetic changeover Sheet 23a Control Logic Ca C03 Enable Free Block 0 l Input Einv H860 2000 __ Output Einv Input AusV H862 2000 i B Output AusV Sampling time T1 2ms
263. ut 2 diameter actual value terminals 98 99 Analog output 2 can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0310 actual diameter IF_CU AQ80 X Analog output 2 offset Offset analog output 2 terminals 97 99 diameter actual value The parameter value is subtracted IF_CU AQ80 OFF Analog output 2 normalization Gain after subtracting the offset 1 0 corresponds to 10V IF_CU AQ80A X1 Analog output 1 offset Offset analog output 3 terminals 98 99 The parameter value is subtracted IF_CU AQ110 OFF Analog output 1 normalization Gain after subtracting the offset 1 0 corresponds to 10V IF_CU AQ110A X1 Analog output 1 torque setpoint terminals 97 99 Analog output 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO329 torque setpoint IF_CU AQ110 X Input value for limit value monitor 1 GWM 1 The input of the input signal for limit value monitor 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO307 speed actual value 1Q2Z_01 G10 X Input comparison value GWM 1 The input of the comparison value for limit value monitor 1 can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO303 speed setpoint 1Q2Z_01 G70 X Adaptation input value GWM 1 Adapts the input signal for limit value monitor 1 1 no adaptation 2S absolute value generation 3 sign revers al 1Q2Z_01 G40 XCS Value Type Value Type Value Min Max T
264. ut output B2527 H521 Value 1 Mode for the bidirectional inputs outputs Type B 0 Digital input gt B2527 1 Digital output gt H521 default IF_CU BinOut DI1 Select digital input output B2528 H522 Value 1 Mode for the bidirectional inputs outputs Type B 0 Digital input gt B2528 1 Digital output gt H522 default IF_CU BinOut DI2 Select digital input output B2529 H523 Value 1 Mode for the bidirectional inputs outputs Type B 0 Digital input gt B2529 1 Digital output gt H523 default IF_CU BinOut DI3 Select digital input output B2530 H524 Value 1 Mode for the bidirectional inputs outputs Type B 0 Digital input gt B2530 1 Digital output gt H524 default IF_CU BinOut DI4 Status word 1 from CU Type W Receive word 2 from CU can be connected with the application specific destination IF_CU Verteilung Y1 Actual value W2 from CU Min 2 0 Receive word 2 from CU can be connected to the application specific destination Max 2 0 Type R IF_CU Istwert_W2_ Y Actual value W3 Min 2 0 Receive word 3 from CU can be connected to the application specific destination Max 2 0 Type R IF_CU Istwert_W3 Y Actual value W5 torque setpoint Min 2 0 Receive word 5 from the CU is connected to the fixed connector torque setpoint in Max 2 0 the CU IF_CU Istwert_W5 Y Type R Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 d553 b d 15a d554 b d 15a d5
265. uts limit value monitors 1 and 2 Inputs for control commands Digital inputs outputs Inputs for control commands pre assigned digital inputs terminals 53 60 Motorized potentiometers 1 and 2 Free display parameters Sheet Contents Controller Speed controller on the T400 Tension controller Communication CU Interface PROFIBUS DP Interface Peer to Peer Interface USS Slave Interface Open control and monitoring Power on control open loop Splice control open loop Monitoring drive fault and alarm message Control word status word Control and status words to from CU s tatus words from T400 Pre assignment of control words from CB and Peer to Peer Control words from T400 Free function blocks Arithmetic changeover Control logic and constant value Example with free blocks Cut tension for splice SIEMENS AG A amp D LD R Sheet A Standard SPW 420 axial winder software version 2 0 List of contents Explanation of the abbreviations and symbols in the block diagram Output setpoint input command Controller enable Hysteresis Proportional gain Lower limit Upper limit Threshold Multiplexer changeover switch Peer to peer protocol At the lower limit signal At the upper limit signal Set command Setting value Sampling time Ramp down time or differentiating time constant Integrating time constant Integral action time Ramp up rounding off time Ramp down rounding o
266. value smooth The setting value is output at the smoothing block if the setting H886 is a logical 1 i e for H886 1 KRO883 H885 The input for the setting value can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant R_output FREI BST Glaet SV Setting smooth The input for setting can be connected with the applic ation specific source Default B2000 constant B_output FREI_BST Glaet S Drive number Drive ID for documentation purposes PARAMZ_01 DRNR X SIMADYN D Reserved for automatic identification of a SIMADYN D module PARAMZ_01 Simadyn Y Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value B2000 Type B Value KR0000 Type R Value KR0000 Type R Value KROOOO Type R Value 0 Type R Units ms Value KROOOO Type R Value B2000 Type B Value 0 Type Value 80 Type l 147 Base drive parameters 6 Base drive Prerequisite H282 0 Advantages parameters For parameter H282 0 the closed loop speed and torque control are computed on the base drive The sum of the speed setpoints is entered directly in front of the speed controller the ramp function generator on the T400 technology module is used and the torques are entered as supplementary signal or as limits RB The best configuration from the dynamic performance standpoint lowest deadtimes The speed controller optimization routine of the base drive
267. ve torque limit can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO351 torque limit SREFZ_07 NC004 X Input torque limit Input torque limit can be connected with the application specific source Default KRO313 output tension control SREFZ_07 NC003 X2 Enable freely assignable_blocks Enable for all freely assignable blocks which are configured in two cycle groups T1 2ms or T5 128ms 1Q1Z_01 B04 1 Start point X1 Characteristic 1 abscissa value point 1 FREI_BST Kenn_1 A1 Start point Y1 Characteristic 1 ordinate value point 1 FREI_BST Kenn_1 B1 End point X2 Characteristic 1 abscissa value point 2 FREI_BST Kenn_1 A2 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Parameters Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type KR0351 R KR0351 R KR0313 R 0 0 0 0 1 0 R 141 Parameters H803 b d 23a H804 b d 23a H805 b d 23a H806 b d 23a H807 b d 23a H808 b d 23a H809 b d 23a H810 b d 23a H811 b d 23a H812 b d 23a 142 End point Y2 Characteristic 1 ordinate value point 2 FREI BST Kenn_1 B2 Input quantity char_1 Characteristic 1 input variable can be connected with the application specific source Default KR0000 constant R_output Y 0 0
268. winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 39 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description Loading 2 position ing mechanism Tachometer Fig 3 3 Loading position when splicing A connection must be established from the Tension controller on output to the Partner drive is in the tension controlled mode input of the partner so that the drives can be mutually interlocked The pre assignments of these signals refer to block diagram 17 C hangeover position Swiveling ae ZN Glue roll LO Splice knife Tension measurement 5 Tachometer Fig 3 4 Change position when splicing Note The splice functions are only provided for relatively simple requirements The actual functions to be implemented must be precisely clarified with the manufacturers of the mechanical design of the splice mechanism If you have any doubt please contact your local SIEMENS office H022 Source tension controller on Refer to Chapter 5 H148 Time for reverse winding after a splice Refer to Chapter 5 H149 Speed setpoint reverse winding after a splice Refer to Chapter 5 H169 Knife in the cutting position Refer to Chapter 5 H170 Partner drive is in the closed loop tension control mode Refer to Chapter 5 Table 3 12 Parameters for the splice control 40 Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Function description 3 4 Closed loop control 3 4 1 Closed loop control structure block d
269. with a selectable support force as shown in Fig 4 8 a tension setpoint can be entered at the T400 technology module in order to be able to use its winding hardness control open loop H206 0 The tension setpoint can be still controlled using a ramp function generator with H284 0 The output of the winding hardness characteristic can then be output for example at terminals 97 99 and they can then serve as setpoint for the pneumatic adjustable dancer roll support The normal web velocity setpoint input in this case terminals 90 91 can be used to thread the material web After the web has been thread the parameterized tension is established by switching in the tension control 1 L A L 11 l lI gt H145 Fig 4 7 Speed torque characteristic with web break Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples Nip position Q x AS V set 4 Dancer roll lt 1 gt R L x we U Ld gt m o lt 4 gt KA lt 13 gt 24 3 Tas Zset lt 13 gt lt 2 gt 0 10V Position act ual value eset Term 96 99 Term 90 91 Term 92 93 10 Term 97 99 H 097 324 H 069 320 H 081 321 H 103 328 H082 0 H 083 82 H20 Position controller D Tension controller 0 com puter 1 8 0 lt 7 gt Lim iting W inding hardness characteristic 7 T 400 6 0 H177 1 iam eter 9 lt 3 gt Speed setpoint Speed act
270. with the standard connection via parameter H080 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 29 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Function description The main tension setpoint can be fed through a ramp function generator with ramp up and ramp down times which can be parameterized H175 and H176 For applications using a dancer roll H203 2 or 3 we recommend that a ramp function generator should be used i e H284 0 Otherwise the ramp function generator can be disabled i e H284 1 Ramp function generator Winding hardness H206 is used to select whether the subsequent winding hardness characteristic characteristic is applied The supplementary tension setpoint is added after the characteristic the source is selected via H083 The resulting total setpoint can be smoothed again using H192 and is available at d304 as display parameter d304 Sum tension setpoint position reference Display parameter value Table 3 6 Parameters for the setpoint tension position control 3 1 3 1 Winding hardness control block diagram 7 Purpose The winding hardness control reduces the tension as the diameter increases Generally it is only used for winders to ensure that the inner layers are more tightly wound Dancer roll For closed loop dancer controls the position reference value is entered as supplementary tension setpoint The output of the characteristic available as d328 can be output at one of the analog outputs as setpoint for the dancer rol
271. without V signal DIAMZ_07 DOV Freigabe o H281 Atemativeoncommans fiaz onsetacti fo H282 Changeover speed controlertoCUorTao0 fianz ozB51u Jo H283 controler erabe LIENS LHR o Jo de H284 Tension setpoint inhibit ramp fct generator Tensz o1 T13202 fa dle H285 Enable web break detection LIENS 07 Bahnrisserken 1 de H286 Thickness diameter rato DIAZ ozovexi Joo R 1 1z o1 B011 H288 Enable PROFIBUS 1Q1Z_01 B01 1 H289 Enable peer to peer 1Q1Z_01 B02 1 H290 Upper speed setpoint limiting SREFZ_07 S1000 LU 1 0 H291 Lower speed setpoint limiting SREFZ_07 S1000 LL 1 0 H292 Ramp up time speed setpoint SREFZ_07 S1000 TU 1000 ms w i H401 _ velocity actual value connection tachometer Iaizor als2aax foo H402 Fed value ext web velocity actual vawe IOS orasoax foo H499 Ext status word CONTZ_01 SE110 11 K4549 W H444 Status word 1 at CB IF _COM Send_ZW1 X K4335 H445 Status word 2 at CB IF _COM Send_ZW2 X K0336 H446 Actual value W7 at CB IF_COM Istwert_W7 X KR0000 Axial winder SPW420 SIMADYN D Manual 173 6DD1903 0AB0 Edition 07 99 Appendix Digital output 1 web break terminal 46 B2501 Digital output 2 standstill terminal 47 IF_CU BinOut l2 H572 Input Anz_B2 1Q2Z_01 Anz_B2 1 B2000 H580 Input Anz 11 IQ2Z_01 Anz_l1 X K4000 IF_USS Slave_ZB W14 1 3 5 H610 Input pos torque limit SREFZ_07 NC005 X2 KR0351 H611 Input neg torque limit SREFZ_07 NC004 X KR0351 H612 Input
272. y controlling the circumferential velocity to the sum of the web velocity saturation setpoint overspeed protection Refer to Chapter 3 6 1 for web break The drive can also be shutdown by appropriately parameterizing the web break detection and evaluating the web break signal refer to Chapter 3 6 1 Threading the There is an automatic changeover from closed loop speed to tension material web control when the material web is threaded in system operation In this Torque characteristic 72 case the tension setpoint should be run up and the tension controller enabled whereby the torque limit is set corresponding to the required tension lt 9 gt When the tension is established the torque limit automatically takes over the drive control W ind direction Acceleration tension already established R U 145 n i Fig 4 3 Torque speed characteristic Caution The tension setpoint becomes effective when the tension controller is enabled Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 Configuring instructions and examples Nip position QO gt P Zset lt 1 gt Vset lt 1 gt M1 Tachometer LU lt 2 gt V set tr Oe ee m R kn 151 l l D nact W idth Diam eter S computer 9 lt 3 gt l Compen T400 U sation 9 Vsoll l D n l i lt 6 gt I I I I I I H 200 1 0 ip i I H141 0 0 E 15 i I I I I I x I I lt 11 gt Saturation
273. ype Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Min Max Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Min Max Type KR0324 R KR0310 R 1 0 R KR0329 R KR0307 R KR0303 R Axial winder SPW 420 SIMADYN D Manual 6DD1903 0ABO Edition 07 99 H110 b d 10 H111 b d 10 H112 b d 10 H113 b d 10 H114 b d 10 H115 b d 10 H116 b d 10 H117 b d 10 H118 b d 10 Smoothing input value GWM 1 Smoothes the input signal for limit value monitor 1 IQ2Z_01 G60 T Adaptation comparison value GWM 1 Adapts the comparison value for limit value monitor 1 1 no adaptation 2 absolute value generation 3 sign reversal 1Q2Z_01 G100 XCS Interval limit GWM 1 Enters the interval limits for the limit value monitor 1 1Q2Z_01 G110 L Hysteresis GWM 1 Enters the hysteresis for limit value monitor 1 1Q2Z_01 G110 HY Output signal from GWM 1 terminal 52 The output signal for limit value monitor 1 can be connected with e KR0403 input value gt comparison value e KR0404 input value lt comparison value e KRO0405 input value comparison value e KRO0406 input value comparison value e KRO0411 length setpoint reached Default KRO403 input signal gt comparison value 1Q2Z_01 G130 1 Input input value for limit value monitor 2 GWM 2 The selection of the input signal for limit value monitor

Axial Winder SPW420 for the T400 Technology Board

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents